Pioneer DVD Recorder DVR 532H S User Manual

DVD Recorder  
DVR-633H-S  
DVR-533H-S  
DVR-532H-S  
DVR-531H-S  
RegisterYour Product on  
www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)  
www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
READ INSTRUCTIONS — All the safety and  
operating instructions should be read before the  
product is operated.  
RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS — The safety and  
operating instructions should be retained for  
future reference.  
HEED WARNINGS — All warnings on the product  
and in the operating instructions should be  
adhered to.  
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS — All operating and use  
instructions should be followed.  
CLEANING — The product should be cleaned only  
with a polishing cloth or a soft dry cloth. Never  
clean with furniture wax, benzine, insecticides  
or other volatile liquids since they may corrode  
the cabinet.  
ATTACHMENTS — Do not use attachments not  
recommended by the product manufacturer as  
they may cause hazards.  
WATER AND MOISTURE — Do not use this  
product near water — for example, near a  
bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry  
tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming  
pool; and the like.  
ACCESSORIES — Do not place this product on an  
unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.  
The product may fall, causing serious injury to a  
child or adult, and serious damage to the  
product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table recommended by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any  
mounting of the product should follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a  
mounting accessory recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION  
OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY — Never push  
objects of any kind into this product through  
openings as they may touch dangerous voltage  
points or short-out parts that could result in a  
fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any  
kind on the product.  
SERVICING — Do not attempt to service this  
product yourself as opening or removing covers  
may expose you to dangerous voltage or other  
hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service  
personnel.  
If this product is equipped with a polarized  
alternating current line plug (a plug having one  
blade wider than the other), it will fit into the  
outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If  
you are unable to insert the plug fully into the  
outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should  
still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace  
your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety  
purpose of the polarized plug.  
If this product is equipped with a three-wire  
grounding type plug, a plug having a third  
(grounding) pin, it will only fit into a grounding  
type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you  
are unable to insert the plug into the outlet,  
contact your electrician to replace your obsolete  
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the  
grounding type plug.  
DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE — Unplug this  
product from the wall outlet and refer servicing  
to qualified service personnel under the  
following conditions:  
When the power-supply cord or plug is  
damaged.  
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen  
into the product.  
POWER-CORD PROTECTION — Power-supply  
cords should be routed so that they are not likely  
to be walked on or pinched by items placed  
upon or against them, paying particular  
attention to cords at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the product.  
OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING — If an  
outside antenna or cable system is connected to  
the product, be sure the antenna or cable  
system is grounded so as to provide some  
protection against voltage surges and built-up  
static charges. Article 810 of the National  
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides  
information with regard to proper grounding of  
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of  
the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit,  
size of grounding conductors, location of  
antenna-discharge unit, connection to  
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the product does not operate normally by  
following the operating instructions. Adjust only  
those controls that are covered by the operating  
instructions as an improper adjustment of other  
controls may result in damage and will often  
require extensive work by a qualified technician  
to restore the product to its normal operation.  
If the product has been dropped or damaged in  
any way.  
When the product exhibits a distinct change in  
performance — this indicates a need for service.  
REPLACEMENT PARTS — When replacement parts  
are required, be sure the service technician has  
used replacement parts specified by the  
manufacturer or have the same characteristics  
as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions  
may result in fire, electric shock, or other  
hazards.  
SAFETY CHECK — Upon completion of any service  
or repairs to this product, ask the service  
technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper  
operating condition.  
WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING — The product  
should not be mounted to a wall or ceiling.  
HEAT — The product should be situated away from  
heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,  
stoves, or other products (including amplifiers)  
that produce heat.  
CART — A product and cart combination should be  
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force,  
and uneven surfaces may cause the product  
and cart combination to overturn.  
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the  
grounding electrode. See Figure A.  
LIGHTNING — For added protection for this  
product during a lightning storm, or when it is  
left unattended and unused for long periods of  
time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This  
will prevent damage to the product due to  
lightning and power-line surges.  
POWER LINES — An outside antenna system  
should not be located in the vicinity of overhead  
power lines or other electric light or power  
circuits, or where it can fall into such power  
lines or circuits. When installing an outside  
antenna system, extreme care should be taken  
to keep from touching such power lines or  
circuits as contact with them might be fatal.  
OVERLOADING — Do not overload wall outlets,  
extension cords, or integral convenience  
receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or  
electric shock.  
VENTILATION — Slots and openings in the cabinet  
are provided for ventilation and to ensure  
reliable operation of the product and to protect  
it from overheating, and these openings must  
not be blocked or covered. The openings should  
never be blocked by placing the product on a  
bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This  
product should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless  
proper ventilation is provided or the  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
WIRE  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered  
to.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810-20)  
POWER SOURCES — This product should be  
operated only from the type of power source  
indicated on the marking label. If you are not  
sure of the type of power supply to your home,  
consult your product dealer or local power  
company.  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810-21)  
LOCATION – The appliance should be installed in a  
stable location.  
GROUND CLAMPS  
NONUSE PERIODS – The power cord of the  
appliance should be unplugged from the outlet  
when left un-used for a long period of time.  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250, PART H)  
Fig. A  
NEC — NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
D1-4-2-2_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER-CORD CAUTION  
DANGER  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the  
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power  
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a  
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a  
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the  
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other  
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they  
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check  
the power cord once in a while. When you find it  
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized  
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En  
VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION  
WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO  
BEAM.  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of  
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property  
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
CAUTION  
– PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO  
NOT USE THIS (POLARIZED) PLUG  
WITH AN EXTENSION CORD.  
RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET  
UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE  
FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT  
BLADE EXPOSURE.  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by  
NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark  
of NEC Corporation.  
ATTENTION POUR PREVENIR LES CHOCS  
ELECTRIQUES NE PAS UTILISER  
CETTE FICHE POLARISEE AVEC UN  
PROLONGATEUR UNE PRISE DE  
COURANT OU UNE AUTRE SORTIE  
DE COURANT, SAUF SI LES LAMES  
PEUVENT ETRE INSEREES A FOND  
SANS EN LAISSER AUCUNE PARTIE  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or  
cords associated with accessories sold with the  
product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California and other governmental  
entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm.  
A DECOUVVERT.  
D2-4-4-1_EF  
Wash hands after handling  
D36-P4_En  
NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER  
This product contains mercury. Disposal of this  
material may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal or recycling  
THIS REMINDER IS PROVIDED TO CALL THE CATV  
SYSTEM INSTALLER’S ATTENTION TO ARTICLE 820-  
40 OF THE NEC THAT PROVIDES GUIDELINES FOR  
PROPER GROUNDING AND, IN PARTICULAR,  
SPECIFIES THAT THE CABLE GROUND SHALL BE  
CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING SYSTEM OF THE  
BUILDING, AS CLOSE TO THE POINT OF CABLE  
information, please contact your local authorities or  
the Electronics Industries Alliance : www.eiae.org.  
K057_En  
ENTRY AS PRACTICAL.  
D1-4-2-8_En  
Recording equipment and copyright: You may use  
this product only to reproduce or copy materials for  
which you own the copyright or have obtained  
permission to copy from the copyright owner or for  
which you otherwise have a legal right to reproduce  
or copy. Unless you own the copyright or have  
obtained permission from the copyright owner or  
otherwise have a legal right to reproduce or copy,  
you may be violating the law, including copyright  
law, and may be subject to payment of damages and  
other remedies.  
K018US_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will  
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since  
hearing damage from loud noise is often  
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of  
sound levels is included for your protection.  
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit  
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your  
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how  
you can maximize the fun and excitement your  
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the  
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of  
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that  
lets the sound come through loud and clear without  
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,  
without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30 Quiet library, soft whispers  
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic  
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.  
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and  
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by  
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your  
hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS  
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,  
thunderclap  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane  
180 Rocket launching pad  
Once you have established a comfortable sound  
level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we  
want you listening for a lifetime.  
S001_En  
CAUTION  
The following caution label appears on your unit.  
Location: inside of the unit  
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this  
product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.  
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers  
or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.  
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.  
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION  
CAUTION  
WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.  
RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B  
ATTENTION  
QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.  
KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING.  
ADVARSEL  
UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.  
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA  
VARNING  
DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN.  
BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE  
VORSICHT  
LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN  
VORHANDEN. AUGEN NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHLAUSSETZEN!  
CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE  
PRECAUCIAÓN  
E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER.  
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA  
VARO!  
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE.  
ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.  
DRW2247 - A  
D3-4-2-1-8_A_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
06 Recording  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 10  
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . 10  
About the internal hard disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Recording time and picture quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 51  
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 55  
Initializing a recordable DVD disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
02 Connecting up  
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Front panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Using other types of video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1). . . 17  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2). . . 18  
Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver. . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Plugging in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
07 Playback  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents  
of a disc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Switching DVD soundtracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
03 Controls and displays  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
04 Getting started  
Switching on and setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system . . . . . . 27  
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and  
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Making your first recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
08 Copying and back-up  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Using Copy Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Using disc back-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
09 Editing  
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Command menu panel options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Editing accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
HDD genres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
05 Using the TV Guide On Screen™  
interactive program guide  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ system. . . . . . . . . . 35  
The Listings screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Recording programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Setting program reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Searching for programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Scheduling recordings and reminders . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Changing setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
TV Guide On Screen™ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . 47  
10 The PhotoViewer  
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 The Disc Setup menu  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs 89  
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 90  
Audio DRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
13 The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
14 Additional information  
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . 98  
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Manual recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Additional information for cable/satellite/STB  
(set-top box) users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Language code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 108  
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Index  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
CBhaepfteor 1re you start  
VR mode  
HDD  
Chase play  
Features  
Using chase play you can start watching a recording  
from the beginning, while continuing to record. For  
example, you could set a timer recording for a program  
that you’re going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then  
start watching while the recorder is still recording the  
program 15 minutes ahead of you.  
Built-in TV Guide On Screen™ interactive  
program guide  
The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive on-  
screen TV programming guide. You can see what’s on TV  
today and in the coming week, search TV listings by  
program categories or by using your own keywords, and  
even set the recorder to record programs with the press  
of a button.  
Simultaneous recording and playback  
VR mode  
HDD  
HDD and DVD playback and recording are completely  
independent. For example, you can record a broadcast  
program to a recordable DVD, while watching another  
recording you already made on the same DVD.  
Please note:  
The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide incorporated in this  
product supports and provides listings for cable-ready televisions, cable  
set-top-box supplied from most cable operators, and digital cable  
services as well as over-the-air broadcasts. TV Guide On Screen™ does  
not support or provide listings for any satellite services. Satellite  
subscribers should use the manual recording features built into this  
unit to record shows.  
On-screen Help  
Use the HELP button on the remote control to display a  
help screen for the current operation.  
Disc Navigator  
HDD  
HDD recording  
The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way  
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For  
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail  
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator  
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD  
content.  
Record video on the DVR-633H-S’s internal 160 GB  
(gigabyte) hard disk (HDD), or the DVR-533H-S/DVR-  
532H-S/DVR-531H-S’s 80 GB HDD.  
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in  
the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep  
recordings on the HDD or record to DVD.  
Home Menu  
Copy between HDD and DVD  
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the  
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting  
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and  
editing a recording.  
You can copy recordings between the HDD and DVD.  
When copying to DVD you can usually use the high-  
speed copy feature.  
You can also choose to copy material at a different  
recording quality from the original. For example, you  
might want to copy an XP mode (highest quality)  
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a  
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same  
disc.  
Progressive scan-compatible  
Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan  
effectively doubles the amount of video information fed to  
your TV or monitor. (Check your TV/monitor for  
compatibility with this feature.)  
Cinema-style surround sound in your home  
One Touch Copy  
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-  
compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound  
effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.  
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title  
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing  
a button.  
One Touch Recording  
High quality, real-time copying  
Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately  
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the ì REC  
button, the recording time is extended by another 30  
minutes, up to six hours.  
When recording to the HDD, picture quality data is also  
stored so that picture quality can be optimized when  
making real-time copies to DVD later.  
(This is applicable only to MN16–32 HDD recordings  
(Video Mode Off), or MN12–32 / XP+ recordings (Video  
Mode On).  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Optimized recording  
Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD  
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality  
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc  
with the settings that you made.  
Video mode  
player  
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back  
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives  
compatible with DVD-Video playback .  
* ‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-Video format for  
recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in  
‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-  
R / DVD-RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback  
equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play  
DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.  
Please note that the quality of recordings may be  
reduced if a longer recording time is used.  
*
HDD  
Super high quality HDD recording  
Using the XP+ recording mode you can record super  
high quality video (around 15 Mbps data transfer rate) to  
the HDD.  
High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio  
WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback  
In the LPCM recording mode, audio is recorded in  
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers  
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture  
quality.  
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and  
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.  
Disc Back-up  
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to  
back-up important material on a finalized Video mode  
DVD to another recordable DVD disc. The material is first  
copied to the HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.  
Picture quality adjustment features  
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality  
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the  
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to  
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize  
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.  
HDD  
Recovery Recording  
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc  
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the  
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.  
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily  
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct  
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the  
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc  
by title, chapter or time.  
Note on copying:  
You may use this product only to reproduce or copy materials for  
which you own the copyright or have obtained permission to copy  
from the copyright owner or for which you otherwise have a legal right  
to reproduce or copy. Unless you own the copyright or have obtained  
permission from the copyright owner or otherwise have a legal right  
to reproduce or copy, you may be violating the law, including  
copyright law, and may be subject to payment of damages and other  
remedies.  
Manual recording  
In addition to six preset recording quality modes, the  
manual recording mode allows you to access 34 different  
recording quality/time settings, giving you precise  
control over the recording.  
Record from a DV camcorder  
DVR-633/533H-S only  
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input for  
connection to a DV camcorder. This makes it ideal for  
transferring camcorder footage to DVD or HDD for  
editing.  
What’s in the box  
Please confirm that the following accessories are in the  
box when you open it.  
VR mode  
Safe, non-destructive editing  
• Remote control  
When editing Play List content, the actual content of the  
disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited  
version (the Play List content) just points to various parts  
of the Original content.  
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2  
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)  
• G-LINK™ cable  
• RF antenna cable  
• Power cable  
• Blank DVD-RW disc  
• Quick start guide  
• These operating instructions  
• Warranty card  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Putting the batteries in the remote  
control  
Using the remote control  
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote  
control:  
1
Open the battery compartment cover on the  
back of the remote control.  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the  
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.  
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other  
equipment located close to this unit.  
2
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the  
operating range of the remote.  
compartment following the indications (,) inside  
the compartment.  
• When the batteries run down or you change the  
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset  
codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control  
Mode on page 96 and Setting up the remote to control  
your TV on page 98 to reset them.  
• Use within the operating range in front of the remote  
control sensor on the front panel, as shown.  
3
Close the cover.  
23ft  
• You can control this recorder using the remote  
sensor of another Pioneer component using the  
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel  
connections on page 14 for more information.  
Important  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as  
leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.  
Disc / content format playback  
compatibility  
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together—  
although they may look similar, different batteries  
may have different voltages.  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each  
battery match the indications in the battery  
compartment.  
General disc compatibility  
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc  
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally  
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc  
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as  
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable  
format—see below for further compatibility information.  
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to  
be used for a month or more.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
DVD-Video  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
Audio CD  
Video CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD  
CD-R/RW compatibility  
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing  
Corporation.  
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD, ISO 9660 CD-  
ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG files  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:  
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file  
systems are both compatible with this recorder.  
About DualDisc playback  
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.  
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and  
Video CD)  
DVD-R/RW compatibility  
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs.  
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only  
Compatible media:  
• DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x, Ver. 1.2 / 2–4x and Ver.  
1.2 / 2–6x  
Compressed audio compatibility  
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW  
• DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x / 16x, and Ver. 2.1  
/ 1–8x / 1–16x  
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),  
Windows Media Audio (WMA)  
Recording formats:  
• Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz  
• DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-  
Video format (Video mode)  
• Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)  
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes  
• VBR WMA playback: No  
Readable formats:  
• DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-  
Video format (Video mode)  
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec  
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be  
playable but some parts of the specification are not  
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)  
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD  
writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt  
the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs  
between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we  
recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs.  
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No  
(see also DRM in the Glossary on page 110)  
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’  
limited compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs.  
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for  
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do  
not use for other file types)  
Model  
Playable  
Yes1,2,3  
Yes1  
Recordable  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these  
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these  
limits are playable)  
DVR-7000  
No  
DVR-810H/DVR-57H  
No  
DVR-210/DVR-310/DVR-510H  
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized  
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.  
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when  
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.  
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.  
About DualDisc playback  
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains  
DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other side contains  
non-DVD content such as digital audio material.  
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the  
CD Audio specification and therefore may not play.  
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the  
opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched  
discs may not be playable.  
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio  
content will not play.  
For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification,  
please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility  
Frequently asked questions  
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?  
The most important difference between DVD-R and  
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,  
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.  
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc  
approximately 1,000 times.  
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates  
For more information, see About DVD recording on  
page 49.  
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio  
content.  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers  
to an audio compression technology developed by  
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by  
• What’s VR mode?  
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode  
designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible  
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video  
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are  
more compatible with other DVD players.  
®
®
using Windows Media Player for Windows XP,  
®
®
Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10  
series.  
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are  
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• How do I change the format of a disc?  
Both DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for  
Video mode or VR mode recording. DVD-R discs are  
ready for Video mode recording when you first load  
them into the recorder. You can, however, initialize  
them for VR mode recording from the Disc Setup  
menu.  
JPEG file compatibility  
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*  
still image files  
*File format used by digital still cameras  
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0  
• Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels  
• Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels  
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No  
DVD-RW discs can be initialized and re-initialized for  
either mode at any time (although initializing will  
erase all the data on the disc).  
• Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?  
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jif, .jfif (must be used for  
the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for  
other file types)  
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded  
in Video mode* are playable in a standard DVD  
player, but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process  
fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable  
to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.  
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders  
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders  
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)  
DVD-R discs recorded in VR mode are not playable in  
standard DVD players, but may be playable in other  
DVD recorders and DVD-ROM drives (in the case of  
DVD-ROM drives, the disc will need to be finalized  
first).  
PC-created disc compatibility  
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be  
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application  
software used to create the disc. In these particular  
instances, check with the software publisher for more  
detailed information.  
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in  
some players and other recorders.  
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are  
not compatible with this recorder.  
Note that discs may not play due to recording or disc  
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc or pickup  
lens, etc.  
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes  
for additional compatibility information.  
This label indicates playback compatibility with  
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video  
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with  
a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can  
only be achieved using a CPRM compatible device.  
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs  
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
*
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to  
protect against possible HDD failure.  
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-  
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs  
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s  
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-  
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD  
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback  
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs  
recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store  
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up  
your important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to  
protect against accidental loss.  
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept  
resposibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any  
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from  
HDD failure.  
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.  
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’  
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection  
system (see CPRM on page 50) on CPRM-compliant  
discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played  
on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM.  
• Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes  
during EPG download when the display shows EPG).  
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.  
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.  
• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of  
editing can I do?  
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid  
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden  
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in  
temperature can cause condensation to form inside  
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.  
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD  
recorder to edit discs. With VR mode discs, you can  
edit by making a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when  
to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc  
according to the Play List.  
• While the recorder is switched on (including during  
EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not  
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity  
off from the breaker switch.  
Original  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Title 3  
• Do not move the recorder immediately after  
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,  
please follow the steps below:  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3 Chapter 1  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the  
display, wait at least two minutes.  
2 Unplug from the wall socket.  
3 Move the recorder.  
Title 1  
Title 2  
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on  
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be  
lost.  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Play List  
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an  
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD  
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems  
include playback unexpectedly freezing and  
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words  
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content  
and the edited version.  
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.  
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs  
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of  
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will  
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.  
Original content refers to what’s actually recorded  
on the disc.  
Play List content refers to the edited version of the  
disc—how the Original content is to be played.  
Optimizing HDD performance  
About the internal hard disk drive  
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on  
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the  
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the  
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD  
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see  
Optimize HDD on page 88).  
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of  
equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it  
is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the  
recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or  
that normal playback and recording will not be possible.  
Please understand that in the event of repair or  
replacement of the HDD or related components, all your  
HDD recordings will be lost.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
CChoaptnern2 ecting up  
Rear panel connections  
1
2
3
4
5
INPUT 1  
R
VHF/  
UHF  
OUTPUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
Y
P
B
R
L
R
L
IN  
OUT  
AC IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
P
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT 3  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT 2  
S-VIDEO  
8
7
6
1
AC IN  
8
G-LINK™  
After making all other connections, connect to a power  
outlet using the supplied power cable only.  
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable for use with  
the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide and  
a control-capable set-top box.  
2
Audio/video inputs 1 and 3  
Two sets of audio/video inputs (stereo analog audio;  
composite and S-video video) that you can use to connect  
to satellite receivers, TVs, VCR or other source  
component for recording.  
Front panel connections  
3
Audio/video outputs 1 and 2  
Two sets of audio/video outputs (stereo analog audio;  
composite and S-video video) that you can use to connect  
TVs or monitors.  
DV IN  
S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO)  
R
AUDIO  
INPUT 2  
4
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or  
9
10  
monitor with a component video input.  
On the right side of the front panel a flip-down cover  
hides more connections.  
5
VHF/UHF IN (RF IN)/OUT  
Connect your TV antenna to the VHF/UHF IN (RF IN)  
jack. The signal is passed through to the VHF/UHF OUT  
jack for connection to your TV.  
9
DV IN (DVR-633/533H-S only)  
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a  
DV camcorder.  
6
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT  
10 Audio/video input 2  
A digital audio output for connecting to an AV amp/  
receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder or other equipment  
with optical digital input.  
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and  
S-video video), especially suitable for camcorders, game  
consoles, portable audio, etc.  
7
CONTROL IN  
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of  
another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT  
terminal and bearing the Pioneer mark. Connect the  
CONTROL OUT of the other component to the  
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Easy connections  
The setup described here is a basic configuration that allows you to record TV programs on both this recorder and your  
VCR. When watching recordings from this recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to input 2 to watch a video playing  
in the VCR.  
Important  
• This recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or  
your VCR via this recorder) using AV cables, as the picture from this recorder will not appear properly on your TV.  
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and  
unplugged from the wall outlet.  
A/V  
IN 1  
A/V  
IN 2  
TV  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
5
3
2
4
VHF/UHF  
OUT  
A/V  
OUT  
VCR  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
VHF/UHF  
OUT  
INPUT  
R
1
OUTPUT  
1
VHF/  
UHF  
Y
P
B
R
L
R
L
IN  
OUT  
AC IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
P
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT  
3
2
VHF/UHF  
IN (RF IN)  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect your TV antenna/cable TV outlet to the  
4
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1  
VHF/UHF IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder.  
or 2) to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV.  
Use the supplied three-pin audio/video cable. It is color-  
coded to help you match them up (red/white for the right/  
left audio connections and yellow for video in/outs). Make  
sure you match up the left and right outputs with their  
corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.  
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to  
connect the VHF/UHF OUT jack on this recorder to  
the antenna input on your VCR.  
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect  
this recorder directly to your TV and skip the next  
step.  
5
Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN 2 above)  
using a set of audio and video cables.  
• See the following page if you want to use S-video or  
3
Use an RF antenna cable to connect the antenna  
output on your VCR to the antenna input on your TV.  
component video cables for the video connection.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Using other types of video output  
This recorder has standard (composite), S-video and component video outputs. The main difference between them is  
the quality of the picture. S-video delivers a better picture than composite video, while component video gives better  
picture quality still. The variety of outputs also gives you the flexibility of connecting your particular equipment using  
the best connection type available.  
COMPONENT  
INPUT  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT  
1
2
TV  
INPUT  
R
1
O
S-VIDEO  
1
V
U
Y
P
B
R
L
R
L
OUT  
AC IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
P
S-VIDEO  
3
2
1 Connecting using an S-video output  
S-video carries the picture as separate color and  
luminance (brightness) signals.  
2 Connecting using the component video output  
Component video carries the picture as two separate  
color signals, plus a luminance (brightness) signal.  
There are two S-video outputs for connection to TVs,  
monitors, VCRs or other equipment.  
See also Component Video Out on page 92 for how to set  
up the component video output for use with a progressive  
scan-compatible TV.  
Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect an  
S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to an S-video input on your  
TV, monitor (or other equipment).  
Use a component video cable (not supplied) to  
connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a  
component video input on your TV, monitor (or  
other equipment).  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1)  
If you are using a cable box or satellite receiver with only a few scrambled channels, follow the setup on this page . If  
many or all the channels are scrambled, we recommend using the setup on the following page.  
1
Using the setup on this page you can:  
• Record unscrambled channels by selecting them on this recorder.  
• Record scrambled channels by selecting them on the cable box/satellite receiver.  
• Watch one channel while recording another.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.  
3
Connect the audio/video output of your cable  
box/satellite receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this  
recorder using a set of A/V cables.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
4
Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™  
jack.  
A/V  
IN 1  
This enables you to control the tuner in the cable box  
through the TV Guide On Screen system.  
2
TV  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so  
that the IR receiver on your cable box will pick up the  
control signals (see diagram).  
1
2
A/V  
OUT  
VHF/UHF  
OUT  
Cable box/  
Satellite receiver  
3
VHF/UHF  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
1
VHF/UHF  
OUT  
INPT  
R
1
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
1
VHF/  
UHF  
Y
P
B
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
P
S-VIDEO  
3
2
G-LINK cable  
VHF/UHF  
IN (RF IN)  
1
4
See the manual that came with your cable box if you’re  
not sure where the IR receiver is on the front panel.  
Alternatively, experiment with the remote control,  
operating it from very close range until you find the place  
where the receiver responds.  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1  
or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs  
on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).  
This enables you to watch the output from this recorder.  
Note  
1. The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if they’re available.  
2.The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services as well as over-the-  
air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite services. Satellite subscribers can use the manual recording features built into this unit  
to record shows.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2)  
If many or all the channels you receive by cable or satellite are scrambled, we recommend using this setup.  
Using the setup on this page you can:  
1
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite receiver.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.  
4
Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™  
jack.  
This enables you to control the tuner in the cable box  
2
through the TV Guide On Screen system.  
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so  
that the IR receiver on your cable box will pick up the  
control signals (see diagram).  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
A/V  
IN 1  
2
TV  
VHF/UHF  
OUT  
1
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
INPUT  
R
1
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
1
VHF/  
UHF  
Y
P
B
R
L
R
L
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
G-LINK CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
UDIO  
VI
NPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
P
S-VIDEO  
2
VHF/UHF  
IN (RF IN)  
4
3
G-LINK cable  
1
VHF/UHF  
OUT  
A/V  
OUT  
See the manual that came with your cable box if you’re  
not sure where the IR receiver is on the front panel.  
Alternatively, experiment with the remote control,  
operating it from very close range until you find the place  
where the receiver responds.  
Cable box/  
Satellite receiver  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1  
or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs  
on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).  
This enables you to watch discs.  
3
Connect the audio/video output of your cable  
box/satellite receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this  
recorder using a set of A/V cables.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
Note  
1. • The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another.  
• The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if they’re avail-  
able.  
2.The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services as well as over-the-  
air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite services. Satellite subscribers can use the manual recording features built into this unit  
to record shows.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver  
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/receiver using the digital  
optical output. In addition to the digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog  
connection.  
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the standard (composite) video  
output (as shown here), or the S-video or component video connections.  
See also Audio Out Settings on page 93 for how to set up the digital audio output. (Noise may be output from your  
speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amp/receiver.)  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR or other component using A/V cables. Always connect  
it directly to your TV.  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
TV  
VIDEO  
IN  
4
VIDEO  
AV amp/  
OUT  
receiver  
1
A/V  
IN  
DIGITAL IN  
OPTICAL  
2
VHF/UHF  
OUT  
3
INPUT  
R
1
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
1
VHF/  
UHF  
Y
P
B
R
L
R
L
IN  
OUT  
AC IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
P
S-VIDEO  
3
2
VHF/UHF  
IN (RF IN)  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
3
Use an optical digital audio cable (not supplied)  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT jack on this  
recorder to an optical digital input on your AV amp/  
receiver.  
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround  
sound.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1  
or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs  
on your AV amp/receiver.  
1
4
Connect the AV amp/receiver’s video output to a  
video input on your TV.  
Note  
1. If your AV amp/receiver doesn’t have an optical digital input, but has a coaxial type, converter boxes that convert from optical to coaxial are  
available at specialist audio dealers.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting a DV camcorder  
DVR-633/533H-S only  
Connecting other AV sources  
Using the front panel DV INjack, it is possible to connect  
a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder  
and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to  
DVD-R/RW.  
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder  
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ENTER  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
PULL  
-
OPEN  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ì
REC  
STANDBY/ON  
Important  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is  
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-  
VHS video decks.  
1
2
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ENTER  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
PULL  
-
OPEN  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ì
REC  
STANDBY/ON  
Analog camcorder  
DV  
IN  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
DV  
OUT  
VCR  
DV camcorder  
1
Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your  
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this  
recorder.  
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR  
1
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV  
jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the front  
panel DV IN jack of this recorder.  
or camcorder.  
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the  
video connection.  
Plugging in  
2
Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your  
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.  
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or  
camcorder.  
1
Use only the supplied power cable to connect  
this recorder to a power outlet.  
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the  
video connection.  
• The front panel connections make convenient  
connections for a camcorder input.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
CChaoptnert3rols and displays  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
PULL - OPEN  
ENTER  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
HOME  
MENU  
ì
REC  
RETURN  
STANDBY/ON  
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
10 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 66)  
9
1
STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing  
title to DVD or the HDD. See also the Note on copying on  
page 9.  
2
3
Disc tray  
DISC NAVIGATOR/TOP MENU  
11 ꢀ  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top  
Press to stop recording.  
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.  
12 ì REC  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the  
recording time in 30 minute blocks.  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
5
HDD/DVD indicator  
13 RETURN  
Lights blue when the HDD is selected; orange when DVD  
is selected.  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or  
display.  
6
HDD/DVD  
14 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER  
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to  
select the currently highlighted option.  
Press to switch between the hard disk drive (HDD) and  
DVD for recording and playback.  
7
MENU  
When stopped, the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons can also be used to  
change the TV channel.  
Press to display a DVD-Video disc menu.  
8
Front panel display and IR remote sensor  
15 HOME MENU (page 32)  
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can  
navigate all the functions of the recorder.  
See Display on page 24 for details.  
9
Front panel inputs (page 14)  
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front  
panel input jacks (audio, video and DV ). Especially  
16 ꢅ  
1
Press to start or restart playback.  
convenient for connecting camcorders and other  
portable equipment.  
17 ꢆ  
Press to pause or resume playback.  
18 ꢄ  
Press to stop playback.  
Note  
1.DV input on DVR-633/533H-S only  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
6
DVD (page 27)  
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback.  
Remote control  
7
INPUT SELECT (page 53)  
Press to change the input to use for recording.  
1
2
4
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
OPEN/CLOSE  
8
Alphanumeric buttons, + and CLEAR  
3
5
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;  
channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also  
be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.  
HDD  
DVD  
INPUT  
SELECT  
6
7
ABC  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use the + button to enter non-alphanumeric characters  
and symbols.  
GHI  
PQRS  
+
JKL  
8
TUV  
CH  
9
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
9
CH +/– (page 28)  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
MENU  
10  
12  
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.  
11  
13  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
10 DVD playback functions  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
AUDIO  
(page 29, 64, 65)  
14  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the  
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner  
audio.)  
16  
19  
15  
17  
18  
TV GUIDE  
INFO  
HELP  
DISPLAY  
REV SCAN  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
SUBTITLE  
(page 64)  
PAUSE STOP OK  
BACK CM SKIP  
Displays/changes the subtitles included in  
multilingual DVD-Video discs.  
20  
CASE  
SELECTION  
NEXT  
PREV  
REC  
STEP/SLOW  
STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC  
ANGLE  
(page 65)  
ì
21  
22  
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle  
scenes.  
TV CONTROL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
11 PLAY MODE (page 61)  
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such  
as search, repeat and program play).  
12 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 58, 76) / TOP MENU  
(page 30)  
DVD RECORDER  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top  
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.  
1
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 66)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing  
title to DVD or the HDD. See also the Note on copying on  
page 9.  
13 MENU (page 30)  
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is  
loaded. While in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, press  
to display the panel menu.  
2
Remote control indicator  
Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a  
TV (page 98) and when setting the remote control mode  
(page 96).  
14 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER  
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to  
select the currently highlighted option.  
3
STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
15 HOME MENU (page 32)  
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can  
navigate all the functions of the recorder.  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
16 RETURN  
5
HDD (page 27)  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or  
display. Also use to exit the TV Guide On Screen™  
system.  
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or  
playback.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
17 TV Guide On Screen™ navigation  
21 Recording controls (page 27)  
TV GUIDE  
ì REC  
Press to access the TV Guide On Screen™ system;  
press again to exit.  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the  
recording time in blocks of 30 mins. With a program  
highlighted in the TV Guide On Screen™ system,  
press to set that program to record.  
INFO  
Press to see additional information for the  
highlighted TV Guide On Screen™ item.  
STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
18 HELP  
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.  
REC MODE (page 51)  
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode  
(picture quality).  
19 DISPLAY (page 32)  
Displays/changes the on-screen information  
displays.  
TIMER REC (page 44)  
Press to set a timer recording from the TV Guide On  
Screen™ system.  
20 Playback controls (page 29)  
REV SCAN / FWD SCAN (page 60)  
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press  
again to change the speed.  
22 TV CONTROL (page 98)  
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
PAUSE  
Press to pause playback or recording.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
CM BACK (commercial back)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward  
through the audio or video playing.  
CM SKIP (commercial skip)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward  
through the audio or video playing.  
PREV / NEXT ꢍ  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/  
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu  
page.  
Also use to display the previous/next page of a TV  
Guide On Screen™ listing.  
STEP/SLOW (page 60)  
During playback, press to start slow-motion  
playback; while paused, press to show the previous  
or next video frame.  
Also use to display the previous/next day of a TV  
Guide On Screen™ listing.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Display  
1
2 3  
4
5
6
PM  
L
R
P
10  
9
8
7
1
6
Recording quality indicators (page 50)  
Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.  
XP  
2
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best  
quality).  
Lights when copying.  
3
ì
SP  
Lights during recording; blinks when recording is  
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP  
paused.  
(standard play).  
4
PM  
LP / SLP  
Lights to indicate PM (after midday) for the clock display.  
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long  
play) or SLP (super long play).  
5
(page 37)  
EP / SEP  
Lights when a timer recording has been set.  
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but  
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has  
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)  
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP  
(extended play) or SEP (super extended play).  
MN  
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN  
(manual recording level) mode.  
SAP (page 29)  
Lights when the currently selected TV channel has a  
Second Audio Program channel.  
7
CH (page 28)  
Channel indicator for the built-in TV tuner.  
(page 93)  
Indicates which channels are recorded when Dual  
Mono is selected.  
8
Character display  
9
R / RW  
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or  
DVD-RW.  
(page 92)  
Lights when the component video output is set to  
progressive scan.  
10 PL (page 76)  
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the  
recorder is in Play List mode.  
OVER (page 93)  
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.  
2 3 (page 96)  
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is  
displayed, the remote control mode is 1).  
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is  
loaded.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Chapter 4  
Getting started  
4
With ‘Start’ highlighted press ENTER to start  
using the Setup Navigator.  
Switching on and setting up  
• Highlight Cancel if you want to exit here.  
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you  
can make several basic settings using the Setup  
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the  
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output settings.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock
Complete this setup before you  
start using your recorder.  
Setup
Tuner  
Help  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly  
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting  
to use the recorder.  
Start
Cancel  
Please use the Initial Setup if you  
want to make more detailed settings.  
STANDBY/ON  
5
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Antenna’ or  
‘Cable’ depending on how you receive your  
terrestrial TV channels, then press ENTER.  
You can also select Do not set if you don’t need the  
recorder to retune all the channels (if you’re using the  
Setup Navigator for a second time, for example).  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock AutoChannel Setting  
Help  
Tuner  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Antenna  
Cable  
ENTER  
Do not Set  
1
Switch on your TV and set the video input to this  
After selecting Antenna or Cable the recorder starts  
automatic tuning. This takes a couple of minutes to  
complete.  
recorder.  
2
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the remote  
control or the front panel to switch on.  
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should  
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup  
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the  
Initial Setup menu; see page 92).  
Tuning  
7/68  
Cancel  
If EPG data is downloaded, the clock will automatically be  
set and you can skip to step 7 below.  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select an OSD language,  
1
then press ENTER.  
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, then  
press ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock Language  
Tuner  
Help  
English  
français  
Initial Setup  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Basic  
Clock ClockSetting  
Help  
Tuner  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup Auto  
Manual  
This will also set the audio, subtitle and DVD menu  
language preferences.  
Note  
1.If you want to adjust the clock after EPG data is downloaded, you must reset the unit to its default settings. You can then set the clock manually  
from the Initial Setup menu.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Auto clock setting  
7
Select the kind of TV you have, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or  
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together  
with the program. This recorder can use these  
signals to set the clock automatically.  
‘Standard (4:3)’.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock TVScreen Size  
Help  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the  
channel preset number that broadcasts a time  
signal, then move the cursor down to ‘Start’ and  
press ENTER.  
Tuner  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup Wide(16:9)  
Standard(4:3)  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock AutoClock Setting  
Help  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select, then press ENTER.  
Is your TV compatible with progressive scan  
Tuner  
Date  
11  
/
17  
:
/
2004  
AM  
Wed  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Time  
11  
20  
8
Clock Set CH  
2
video?  
Start  
Next  
Initial Setup  
Clock Progressive  
Help  
Basic  
Tuner  
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you  
see that the time has been set, select Next to proceed.  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup Compatible  
Not Compatible  
Don't Know  
If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN  
to go back to the previous screen and select Manual.  
Manual clock setting  
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select Compatible, Not  
Compatible, or Don’t Know, then press ENTER.  
signals, you can set the clock manually.  
• Note that progressive scan video is only output  
through the component video outputs (see page 16).  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to set your time zone.  
Initial Setup  
9
Press ENTER to finish setting up, or select ‘Go  
1/2  
Basic  
Clock Manual Clock Setting  
Help  
Back’ if you want to start again.  
Tuner  
USA  
Alaska  
Time Zone  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Initial Setup  
D.S.T  
Off  
Basic  
Clock
Tuner  
Help  
Setup is complete!  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup Enjoy using your DVD recorder!  
Finish Setup  
Go Back  
Press then use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to set  
Summer Time to On or Off, then press ENTER.  
Select On if you are currently using summer (daylight  
saving) time.  
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.  
Set the current date and time.  
Other settings you can make  
Initial Setup  
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be  
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,  
however, that you may want to make a couple of  
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set  
up for TV broadcasts.  
2/2  
Basic  
Clock Manual Clock Setting  
Tuner  
Help  
Date  
Setup
01  
00  
/
:
01  
/
2005 SAT  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Time  
00 AM  
USA  
Alaska  
Time Zone  
D.S.T  
Off  
• Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip  
channels where there is no station, as well as  
manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on  
page 92.  
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to change the value in the  
highlighted field.  
• Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set  
up the supplied remote control to control many  
brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your  
TV on page 98.  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to move from one field to  
another.  
• Press ENTER to finish setting the time.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Tip  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen  
system  
• If you need to change any of the settings you just  
made later on, select Setup from the Service bar in  
the main Guide screen.  
1
The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive  
on-screen television program guide. The system offers  
program listings, searching by keyword, timer recording,  
reminders and more. The TV Guide On Screen system is  
a convenient way to find out what's on right now or during  
the coming week, by channel or by genre. It also allows  
you to automatically set your viewing and recording  
selections quickly and easily.  
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for  
playback and recording  
The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front  
panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for  
playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel  
display shows which is currently selected.  
This setup provides you with TV listings in your area.  
1
Press TV GUIDE to begin setup.  
The TV Guide On Screen welcome screen is displayed.  
HDD  
DVD  
Making your first recording  
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic  
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a  
recordable DVD.  
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6  
(Recording).  
2
3
Press ENTER to go to the first setup screen.  
Select the country in which you are using your  
STANDBY/ON  
OPEN/CLOSE  
recorder.  
HDD  
DVD  
CH  
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the  
TV Guide On Screen system.  
At the bottom of each screen you’ll see the buttons you  
need to navigate that screen.  
PLAY  
• If for any reason you need to cancel the setup process  
before it’s completed, you will be asked the next time  
you switch on whether you want to start setting up  
again, or whether to leave it until later.  
PAUSE  
REC  
STOP REC  
ì
Note  
1.The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services as well as over-the-  
air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite services. Satellite subscribers can use the manual recording features built into this unit  
to record shows.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
1
If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and  
this recorder.  
Press STANDBY/ON to switch on.  
Using the built-in TV tuner  
• Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this  
recorder.  
Changing TV channels  
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note  
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback,  
recording or during recording standby.  
2
Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record  
to a recordable DVD.  
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.  
HDD  
DVD  
3
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.  
4
Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the  
CH  
label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the  
disc.  
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the  
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for  
recording.  
• Blank DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recording out of the box.  
ENTER  
5
Use the CH +/– buttons to select the TV channel  
you want to record from.  
CH +/– buttons on the remote  
• You can also use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons on the front panel  
if the recorder is stopped.  
Number buttons on the remote – For example, to  
select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34,  
press 3, 4, ENTER; for channel 102, press 1, 0, 2,  
• Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable  
channels are numbered 1 through 125.  
1
ENTER.  
6
Press ì REC to start recording.  
ꢀ/ꢁ buttons on the front panel  
• By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play)  
mode, which will give you around two hours of  
recording from a blank DVD disc. The different  
recording modes and their recommended uses are  
covered in more detail in the chapter on Recording.  
Changing cable channels  
When a cable box is connected, you can use the remote  
to change cable channels (up to 999).  
• You can pause recording by pressing PAUSE.  
Press ì REC or PAUSE again to restart recording.  
If your cable box is connected to the RF antenna input on  
this recorder:  
7
When you want to stop recording, press  
Use the CH +/– or the number buttons to change  
STOP REC.  
the cable channel  
In this case, you can’t change the channel of the built-in  
tuner.  
Playing back your recording  
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD  
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.  
If your cable box is connected to a set of AV inputs:  
1
Use the INPUT SELECT button to change to the  
Press PLAY to start playback.  
cable box input.  
If you want to stop playback before the end of the  
2
Use the CH +/– or the number buttons to change  
recording, press STOP.  
the cable channel  
Note  
1. Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable channels are numbered 1 through 125.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback  
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This  
is not a malfunction.  
Changing audio channels  
Some TV programs are broadcast with both a main and a  
Second Audio Program (SAP). You can change the TV  
audio using the AUDIO button.  
1
Press STANDBY/ON to switch on.  
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the  
correct video input.  
AUDIO  
2
Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to  
play a DVD.  
Press AUDIO to change the TV audio.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.  
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.  
3
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.  
Mono  
SAP  
4
Load a disc.  
Stereo  
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc  
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-  
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to  
play face down).  
• If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP channel being  
broadcast, you will still hear the main audio channel.  
• If the sound is poor quality when set to Stereo, you  
can often improve it by changing to Mono.  
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read  
the note on page 31.  
• Please see Disc / content format playback  
compatibility on page 10 if you want to play a Dual  
Disc (DVD/CD hybrid discs).  
Basic playback  
This section shows you how to use your recorder for  
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of  
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as  
repeat and program play, are covered in Playback on  
page 57.  
5
Press PLAY to start playback.  
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc  
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc  
menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for  
Video CD menus.  
STANDBY/ON  
OPEN/CLOSE  
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will  
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.  
HDD  
DVD  
• See the following sections for more details on playing  
specific kinds of discs.  
6
7
To stop playback, press STOP.  
When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject  
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.  
• To open/close the disc tray, press OPEN/CLOSE.  
Remove the disc before putting the recorder into  
standby.  
• Press STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into  
ENTER  
standby.  
PLAY  
STOP  
Important  
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means  
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a  
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it  
is specified.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Playing DVD discs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.  
Playing from the HDD  
The table below shows the basic playback controls when  
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).  
PLAY  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
Press to start playback.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
Playback automatically stops after the end  
of a title is reached.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
when paused.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
to increase the scanning speed.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a  
chapter number then press ENTER to skip  
directly to that chapter within the currently  
playing title.  
On some discs, you can also use the num-  
ber buttons to select numbered items in  
the disc menu.  
During playback, enter a title number then  
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
VR mode only: During playback, enter a  
title number then press ENTER.  
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry  
and start again.  
ENTER  
BACK CM SKIP  
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips  
backward/forward progressively up to a  
maximum of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
BACK CM SKIP  
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips  
backward/forward progressively up to a  
maximum of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
STEP/SLOW  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
STEP/SLOW  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video  
disc.  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-  
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select  
items.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Press to return to the previous level of a  
DVD-Video disc menu.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs  
Playing Video CDs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
Video CDs.  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
1
audio CDs , and WMA/MP3 files.  
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)  
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you  
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
2
can select what to watch.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to start scanning. Press again to  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
increase the scanning speed. (There are  
two scan speeds; the current scan speed  
is shown on-screen.)  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next track (or  
folder for WMA/MP3 disc).  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
During playback, enter a track number  
then press ENTER to skip directly to that  
track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
to increase the scanning speed.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to  
display the previous/next page.  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
During playback, enter a track number  
then press ENTER to skip directly to that  
track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,  
use to select numbered menu items.  
ENTER  
BACK CM SKIP  
Each press skips backward/forward pro-  
gressively up to a maximum of ten min-  
utes forward or three minutes back. Note  
that this function doesn’t work when play-  
ing in PBC mode.  
STEP/SLOW  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed (forward only).  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame (forward only).  
RETURN  
Press to display the disc menu of a Video  
CD playing in PBC mode.  
Note  
1. If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise  
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels  
on page 65).  
2. When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video  
CD in non-PBC mode by pressing to start playback instead of PLAY.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Using the Home Menu  
Displaying disc information on-  
screen  
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the  
features of the recorder.  
You can display various on-screen information about the  
disc loaded or the HDD.  
Note that some options in the Home Menu may be  
grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not  
available at the present time. For example, the  
Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc  
loaded that contains JPEG image files.  
Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu screen:  
HDD  
DVD  
Disc Navigator  
TV GUIDE  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Copy  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Photo Viewer  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select  
the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press  
HOME MENU.  
DISPLAY  
1
Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the  
ENTER  
on-screen information.  
HOME  
MENU  
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc  
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the  
status of just the currently selected playback/  
recording device (HDD or removable disc).  
• The on-screen display automatically disappears after  
150 minutes.  
Home menu options  
2
To hide the information display, press DISPLAY  
repeatedly until it disappears.  
The example displays below are a guide only; actual  
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.  
Disc Navigator (page 58, Disc Setup (page 87)  
page 76)  
TV GUIDE (page 35)  
Initial Setup (page 92)  
HDD and removable disc activity display  
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc  
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to  
switch between the two kinds of display.  
Timer Recording  
(page 37)  
Video/Audio Adjust  
(page 89)  
Play Mode (page 61)  
Copy (page 66)  
Photo Viewer (page 85)  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
The example displays below show high-speed copying  
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.  
7
Audio mode  
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel  
preset (Mono, Stereo, etc.).  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
8
Copy control information  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel  
Remain 10h35m  
Stop  
Hi-Speed Copy  
0h08m left  
Remain –h––m  
Stop  
program.  
9
Disc name  
Shows the disc name.  
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD  
audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3.)  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
10 Finalized  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized.  
Remain 10h35m  
Chase Play  
Rec  
Remain 0h52m  
Stop  
Stop display 2  
1
2
3
Recording time  
Stop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
WNBC  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Relative playback position  
11/14/2005 MON 6:52 PM  
EVENING NEWS  
Stop display 1  
Titles  
Lock Disc  
: Original 99  
: On  
Play List 15  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
Broadcast program name  
Date and time  
Stop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
WNBC  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Resume  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
Finalized  
Rem. 0h35m  
Number of titles/tracks on disc  
Disc Name  
: Comedy shows  
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play  
List titles are shown separately.  
9 10  
DVD-RW Original / Play List  
Play display 1  
1
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback  
is currently set to Original or Play List.  
1
2
3
4
5
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows  
Copy List.  
Play  
DVD-R Video Chapters  
Title Total  
3–2  
0. 00. 13  
15  
0h11m52s  
2
Disc type and mode  
Shows the disc type (HDD, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD, etc.),  
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (VR  
or Video).  
1
2
Number of chapters in title  
Current title and chapter number  
(For CD/Video CD, shows current track; for WMA/MP3,  
shows current folder and track; for JPEG disc, shows  
current folder and file.)  
3
Recording mode and time  
Shows the current recording mode (XP, SP, LP, etc.), and  
the total recording time of the disc.  
3
Elapsed title time  
4
Resume  
(For CD, WMA, MP3, shows elapsed track time; for Video  
Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last  
CD, shows elapsed disc time.)  
place stopped.  
4
5
Total running time of title  
Angle indicator  
5
Recording time remaining  
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in  
Lights during multi-angle scenes.  
the current recording mode.  
6
Station call letters or TV channel  
Shows the station call letters or TV channel preset for the  
built-in TV tuner.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Play display 2  
Tip  
1
2
3
4
5
• When using the simultaneous play and record  
feature, the display shows information for playback  
only.  
Play  
3–2  
0. 05. 13  
! #  
DVD-R Video Chapter Time  
Chapter Total  
ꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆ  
0. 00. 21  
0h01m52s  
4.32Mbps  
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback  
information is displayed.  
Hi-Speed Copy  
Title Name  
: 11/21 soccer game  
• The Video mode disc displays become the same as a  
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.  
1
Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,  
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis  
is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the  
displayed record setting.  
copy, disc back-up  
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in  
progress.  
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are  
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This  
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV  
broadcasts versus DVD.  
2
3
4
Elapsed chapter time  
Total running time of chapter  
Data transfer rate  
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time  
display when the disc is paused.  
1
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.  
Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear  
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that  
the broadcast TV program contains copy control  
information.  
5
Copy protected material (!) / PureCinema  
indicator (#)  
Shows ‘!’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.  
Shows ‘#’ if the current video is 24 fps, progressive scan.  
Recording display  
1
2
3
4
ìRec  
DVD-R Video  
3
0. 00. 15  
10:00 PM  
WNBC  
Stereo  
9:00 PM  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
EVENING NEWS  
Rem.  
0h35m  
Copy Once  
5
6
1
2
3
Current title number  
Elapsed recording time  
Timer recording start and stop times  
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is  
a timer recording.  
4
Remaining recording time available  
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current  
recording mode.  
5
Recording mode  
Shows the current recording mode (XP, SP, LP, etc.), and  
the total recording time of the disc.  
6
Broadcast program title  
Note  
1.Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
Chapter 5  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™  
interactive program guide  
Introduction  
Using the TV Guide On Screen system  
1
Many of the screens have common elements to make  
using the system easier.  
The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive  
on-screen television program guide. The system offers  
program listings, searching by keyword, timer recording,  
reminders and more. The TV Guide On Screen system is  
a convenient way to find out what's on right now or during  
the coming week, by channel or by genre. It also allows  
you to automatically set your viewing and recording  
selections quickly and easily.  
3
SCHEDULE  
SEARCH  
LISTINGS  
4
1
2
5
Before you can start using the TV Guide On Screen  
system, you’ll need to set it up. If you haven’t already  
done this, please turn to Setting up the TV Guide On  
Screen system on page 27 before proceeding.  
Legal Notices  
In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are  
registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or  
one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of  
Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-TV  
Guide International, Inc.  
Aux Etats Unis TV GUIDE et d’autres marques relatives sont des  
marques déposées de Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. et/  
ou d’une de ses sociétés affiliées. Au Canada TV GUIDE est une  
marque déposée de Transcontinental Inc., utilisée sous licence  
de Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.  
1
2
3
4
5
Video window – Allows you to continue watching  
the current program while using the guide.  
Panel ads and panel menu entry – Space for show  
or product advertising (and the panel menu).  
Service bar – Gives access to the various services of  
the guide.  
Time slot – Half-hour time slots are displayed  
horizontally.  
The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license  
from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its  
affiliates.  
Le systéme TV Guide On Screen est fabriqués sous licence de  
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. et/ou d’une de ses sociétés  
affiliées.  
Information box – Shows information about the  
highlighted item.  
TV Guide On Screen icons  
Various icons are used to convey information or show the  
status of an item.  
The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of  
the following issued United States patents 6,498,895; 6,418,556;  
6,331,877; 6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578;  
4,706,121.  
Le systéme TV Guide On Screen est protégés par un ou plusieurs  
brevets émis aux Etats Unis, comme le 6,498,895; 6,418,556;  
6,331,877; 6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578;  
4,706,121.  
Info button – Additional information is  
available; press the INFO button to display.  
Progress Bar – Shows the elapsed time of  
the current program.  
HDTV – Indicates that a program is a high-  
definition broadcast.  
New – The program is new (not a repeat).  
Note  
1 The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services as well as over-the-  
air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite services. Satellite subscribers can use the manual recording features built into this unit  
to record shows.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
TV Guide On Screen navigation  
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons  
you’ll use to navigate the TV Guide On Screen system.  
Stereo – The program is broadcast in stereo.  
CC – The program is broadcast with closed  
captioning.  
Key  
What it does  
TV Rating – Indicates the age rating for the  
program.  
Press to display the TV Guide On  
Screen system (also use to exit).  
TV GUIDE  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ  
Use to navigate screens (highlight an  
item).  
Record Once – One-time only recording.  
Record Daily – Record a program Monday  
through Friday at the same time each day.  
ENTER  
Press to confirm a selection or  
execute an action.  
Can also be used to display the panel  
menu when a forthcoming program is  
highlighted.  
Record Regularly – Record the same program  
any day it airs on the same channel at the same time.  
MENU  
INFO  
Press to display the panel menu.  
Record Weekly – Record a program every week  
at the same time/day.  
Press to cycle through the available  
information for the current program or  
screen.  
Record Suspend – The program is set to record,  
but is suspended because of a conflict with another  
recording (it remains in the schedule). The recording  
resumes when the conflict is cleared.  
ì REC  
Press to set the highlighted program  
to record.  
Number buttons Use for numeric entry.  
Record Off – The program remains in the list,  
but will not be recorded until the frequency is  
changed to one of the above.  
/ ꢍ  
Press to select the previous/next page  
of information (where applicable).  
/ ꢈ  
Press to select the previous/next day.  
Remind Once – One-time only reminder.  
Remind Daily – Remind Monday through Friday  
at the same time each day.  
The Listings screen  
You can consider the Listings screen as the ‘home’  
screen of the TV Guide On Screen system. This is the  
screen you see when you press TV GUIDE.  
Remind Regularly – Remind the same program  
any day it airs on the same channel at the same time.  
From the Listings screen you can:  
• View eight days of program listings.  
• Display information about individual programs.  
• Select a program to start watching.  
• Set a program to remind.  
Remind Weekly – Remind every week at the  
same time/day.  
Remind Suspend – A reminder is set of the  
program, but is suspended because of a conflict with  
another reminder (it remains in the schedule). The  
reminder resumes when the conflict is cleared.  
• Set a program to record.  
• See a thumbnail display of any channel in the video  
window.  
Remind Off – A reminder is set for the program,  
but it is currently off (it remains in the schedule).  
• Access panel and channel ads.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
1
Press TV GUIDE to display Listings screen.  
Weekly – Record the same program at the same  
time /day every week.  
1
SCHEDULE  
SEARCH  
LISTINGS  
Off – Keep the recording in the schedule, but  
don’t record it.  
No record icon – Don’t set a recording.  
Note that setting a program to record in this way will  
result in a recording using all the default options (see  
also Changing the Default Options on page 46).  
If you want to set a recording using settings other than  
the default, use the panel menu.  
• With Listings highlighted in the Service bar at the top  
of the screen, press INFO to display help information.  
Recording programs  
• Press TV GUIDE anytime to exit.  
The simplest way to record a program is to highlight the  
program you want to record and press ì REC (as  
described above), but if you want to set the recording  
options to anything other than the default, the place to do  
it is the Recording Options menu panel. Here you can  
adjust the start and end time, the destination of the  
recording, the recording quality and so on.  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to navigate the  
Listings screen.  
• With a currently showing program highlighted, press  
ENTER to start watching.  
• Move right for later time slots.  
• Use the and buttons to display listings for the  
previous/next day.  
1
From the program listings, highlight the program  
you want to record.  
• Press INFO to display information about the currently  
highlighted channel (if available).  
SCHEDULE  
LISTINGS  
SEARCH  
3
To set the highlighted program to record, press  
ì REC.  
SCHEDULE  
SEARCH  
LISTINGS  
2
Press MENU to display the Episode Options panel  
menu.  
SCHEDULE  
LISTINGS  
SEARCH  
Pressing ì REC just once will set the program to record.  
Press ì REC repeatedly to change the frequency of the  
recording:  
Once – Just record the highlighted program.  
Regularly – Record the same program any day it  
1
airs on the same channel at the same time .  
Note  
1 The program will still be recorded if it starts any time up to the midway point of the originally scheduled program. For example, up to 9:15 for  
a 9:00 to 9:30 program.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
3
4
Highlight ‘set recording’ and press ENTER.  
Set the recording options:  
When the recording is about to start  
The TV Guide On Screen™ system alerts you when a  
scheduled recording is about to start and gives you the  
chance to cancel the recording if you no longer need it.  
When you see the on-screen alert, select either:  
• change channel; start recording  
• don’t change channel; cancel recording  
If there’s a scheduled recording conflict when a  
recording is about to start, you’ll be alerted to this too.  
You can select to record the conflicting program, or  
cancel the recording.  
Canceling and stopping a timer recording in  
progress  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight a field; use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the  
program (but continue recording), or stop recording  
completely if you need to.  
buttons to change the setting.  
frequency – select whether the program will be  
recorded just Once, Regularly (at the same time on  
the same channel), or Weekly (every week at the  
same time/day). There’s also an Off option which  
puts the program in the recording schedule but  
doesn’t record it (you can set it to record later).  
REC  
STOP REC  
ì
start – set the start time of the recording to On time,  
or up to 120 mins. before or after the scheduled time.  
1
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for  
three seconds.  
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator  
disappears); recording continues so that you can  
manually stop recording whenever you like.  
end – set the end time of the recording to On time,  
or up to 120 mins. before or after the scheduled time.  
recorder – select whether you want a DVD or HDD  
recording.  
2
When you want to stop recording completely,  
press STOP REC.  
quality – set the recording mode.  
5
Once all the settings have been made, press  
ENTER to highlight ‘schedule recording’, then press  
ENTER again.  
Tip  
• You can also stop a timer recording immediately by  
pressing STOP REC, then selecting Yes to  
confirm.  
Preventing use of the recorder before a  
timer recording (child lock)  
You can make all the front panel and remote control  
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is  
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make  
sure that the timer settings are not changed before  
recording has finished.  
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.  
The recording is now set (and will appear in the schedule)  
and you’ll be returned to the main listings area.  
2
Press and hold STOP on the front panel for  
three seconds to lock the controls.  
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons  
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly  
displayed again.  
• If you want to cancel the recording, highlight cancel  
and press ENTER.  
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold STOP on  
the front panel for three seconds until the display  
shows UNLOCK.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is  
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then  
press and hold ì REC for three seconds.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight a field; use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons to change the setting.  
frequency – select whether to be reminded just  
Once, Regularly (at the same time on the same  
channel), or Weekly (every week at the same time/  
day). There’s also an Off option which puts the  
program in the reminder schedule but no reminder is  
given (you can set it to remind later).  
Setting program reminders  
By setting a program reminder you can have the recorder  
alert you when a program is about to start on another  
channel. You can set reminders for individual episodes of  
a program, or every time a program airs.  
auto tune – set whether the recorder should  
automatically change channels when a reminder is  
due, or not.  
1
From the program listings, highlight the  
when – set when the reminder is displayed (before,  
on time, or after a program has started).  
program you want to set a reminder for.  
SCHEDULE  
LISTINGS  
SEARCH  
5
Once all the settings have been made, press  
ENTER to highlight ‘schedule reminder’, then press  
ENTER again.  
2
Press MENU to display the Episode Options panel  
menu.  
SCHEDULE  
SEARCH  
LISTINGS  
The reminder is now set (and will appear in the schedule)  
and you’ll be returned to the main listings area.  
When a reminder appears on-screen  
Depending on the settings you made, your program  
reminder will appear on your TV screen around the time  
the program is scheduled to start. You can then highlight  
the program and press ENTER to tune to the program, or  
highlight hide reminders to dismiss the reminder and  
leave the channel unchanged.  
If more than one reminder is set for the same time, select  
the program you want using the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons.  
The reminder will remain on-screen for three minutes  
before it automatically disappears.  
3
4
Highlight ‘set reminder’ and press ENTER.  
Set the reminder options:  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
3
Press to move to the search sub-categories and  
select the sub-category you want.  
Searching for programs  
The Search screen lets you search for programs  
alphabetically, by category or by keyword. You can also  
search for HDTV programs.  
Searching by category  
Here you can search for programs by category, and then  
by a further sub-category if you want.  
1
Select ‘SEARCH’ from the Service bar at the top  
of the screen.  
The sub-categories available depend on the category you  
chose in the last step.  
4
Press ENTER to display a listing of upcoming  
programs that match the categories you chose.  
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then  
use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a search category.  
5
Highlight a program listing and press MENU to  
display the Episode Options menu panel.  
The available categories are:  
• Movies  
• Sports  
• Children  
• Educational  
• News  
See The search Episode Options menu on page 43 for  
more on this.  
• Variety  
• Series  
• If the program listing is a program now being  
broadcast you can press ENTER to start watching it  
immediately.  
• HDTV  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
4
5
Select ‘new search’.  
Searching by keyword  
Using this type of search you can enter a keyword to base  
a search on. The keywords you create are stored so you  
can use them again in the future.  
If you want to change the category, move up and  
select the category you want.  
1
Select ‘SEARCH’ from the Service bar at the top  
of the screen.  
• To search using only the keyword, leave the category  
set to All.  
• If you select a category (HDTV, for example) then  
you’ll only see programs in that category that also  
match the keyword.  
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then  
use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select ‘KEYWORD’.  
6
7
Highlight ‘enter keyword’ and press ENTER.  
Input a keyword to search for.  
• If you already entered any keywords they are  
displayed. Just select one if you want to search using  
it.  
Highlight characters using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons,  
• To edit or delete one of the displayed keywords,  
highlight it and then press MENU. From the menu  
panel you can choose edit search or delete search.  
pressing ENTER to input them.  
• The keyword you input is stored so that you can use it  
again whenever you need it.  
3
Press ENTER to display the Keyword Search  
menu.  
8
Select ‘DONE’ to start the search.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
9
Highlight a program listing, press ENTER, select  
3
4
Press ENTER.  
an episode and press MENU to display the Episode  
Options menu panel.  
Select a letter and press ENTER to display all  
programs starting with that letter.  
5
Highlight a program listing, press ENTER, select  
an episode and press MENU to display the Episode  
Options menu panel.  
See The search Episode Options menu on page 43 for  
more on this.  
• If the program listing is a program now being  
broadcast you can press ENTER to start watching it  
immediately.  
See The search Episode Options menu on page 43 for  
more on this.  
• If the program listing is a program now being  
broadcast you can press ENTER to start watching it  
immediately.  
Alphabetical search  
This search is designed to display all programs that start  
with a particular letter.  
1
Select ‘SEARCH’ from the Service bar at the top  
HDTV search  
Select this option to display a list of all the upcoming  
HDTV broadcasts.  
of the screen.  
1
Select ‘SEARCH’ from the Service bar at the top  
of the screen.  
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then  
use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select ‘ALPHABETICAL’.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then  
Navigation and search tips  
use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select ‘HDTV’.  
• The ꢀ/ꢁ buttons move the highlight between  
options in the panel menu. Use the number buttons  
to input information.  
• If a highlighted field has arrows on either side, use  
the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to cycle through the options.  
• Press ENTER on any option to highlight the default  
command (eg., Done), then press ENTER again to  
execute and close the panel menu.  
• Select Cancel and press ENTER to close the panel  
menu and return to the previous screen, or press  
MENU to cancel any changes and close the menu.  
3
4
Press ENTER to start the search.  
Highlight a program listing and press MENU to  
display the Episode Options menu panel.  
See The search Episode Options menu below for more on  
this.  
• If the program listing is a program now being  
broadcast you can press ENTER to start watching it  
immediately.  
The search Episode Options menu  
From the Episode Options menu you can select:  
go to Service bar – close the menu panel and return  
to the Service bar at the top of the screen.  
tune to channel / watch now – exit the TV Guide On  
Screen guide and tune to the channel.  
set recording – go to the Record Option menu (see  
Recording programs on page 37).  
set reminder – go to the Remind Option menu (see  
Setting program reminders on page 39).  
cancel – close the menu panel and return to the  
highlighted program listing.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
Off: the program remains in the list, but will not  
be remind until the frequency is changed to one of  
the above.  
Scheduling recordings and reminders  
From the Schedule area you can review, edit or delete  
recordings and reminders.  
2
Highlight a program in the list and press MENU  
1
Select ‘SCHEDULE’ from the Service bar at the top  
to display the Schedule Options menu panel.  
of the screen.  
SETUP  
LISTINGS  
SCHEDULE  
SETUP  
LISTINGS  
SCHEDULE  
When you highlight a program in the list you’ll see  
information related to that program appear in the  
information box.  
A list of programs that have record or remind events  
scheduled appears. The icons on the right side indicate  
the status of the events.  
The Schedule Options menu  
Once only recording.  
The Schedule Options menu is accessible by pressing  
MENU when either SCHEDULE is highlighted in the  
Service bar, or a program is highlighted.  
Daily recording (Monday through Friday at the  
same time each day).  
When SCHEDULE is highlighted:  
Regularly – Record the same program any day it  
airs on the same channel at the same time .  
go to Service Bar – close the menu panel and return  
to the Service bar at the top of the screen.  
1
sort by – select a sort order for the program listings.  
Weekly recording (every week at the same time/  
day).  
new manual recording – select and then fill in all  
the necessary fields to set the recording. Select  
schedule recording when your done to save and exit,  
or select cancel to exit without saving.  
Off: the program remains in the list, but will not  
be recorded until the frequency is changed to one of  
the above.  
new manual reminder – select and then fill in all the  
necessary fields to set the reminder. Select schedule  
reminder when you’re done to save and exit, or  
select cancel to exit without saving.  
Once only reminder.  
Daily reminder (Monday through Friday at the  
done – close the menu panel and return to the  
same time each day).  
highlighted program listing.  
cancel – close the menu panel without saving any  
changes and return to the highlighted program  
listing.  
Regularly – Remind the same program any day  
it airs on the same channel at the same time .  
2
When a program is highlighted:  
Weekly reminder (every week at the same time/  
go to Service Bar – close the menu panel and return  
to the Service bar at the top of the screen.  
day).  
Note  
1 The program will still be recorded if it starts any time up to the midway point of the originally scheduled program. For example, up to 9:15 for  
a 9:00 to 9:30 program.  
2 The reminder will still appear if the program starts any time up to the midway point of the original schedule. For example, up to 9:15 for a 9:00  
to 9:30 program.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
watch now – start watching the selected program  
(this option is tune to channel for a program that  
isn’t showing now).  
As you highlight an option you can see the settings you  
can adjust in that area:  
System Settings – Zip/postal code and cable setup  
set recording – set the program to record (set the  
recording options from the following menu).  
Channel Display – Channel position, tuning  
channel, display on/off, etc.  
• delete recording – remove the recording from the  
schedule (requires confirmation).  
Default Options – General, recording and reminder  
defaults  
• edit recording – edit the recording settings from the  
following menu.  
Changing the System Settings  
The System Settings include your zip/postal code and  
your cable TV setup.  
• set reminder – set the program to remind (set the  
reminder options from the following menu).  
delete reminder – remove the reminder from the  
schedule (requires confirmation).  
1
Highlight the ‘Change System Settings’ item.  
edit reminder – edit the reminder settings from the  
following menu.  
cancel – close the menu panel and return to the  
highlighted program listing.  
Changing setup options  
You can change TV Guide On Screen settings from the  
Setup menu. Setup options are divided into three  
categories: System Settings, Channel Display, and  
Default Options.  
2
Press ENTER to display the current settings and  
1
Select ‘SETUP’ from the Service bar at the top of  
the options to change them.  
the screen.  
L1  
3
Select one of the options, then follow the on-  
2
Use the button to select one of the setup  
screen instructions.  
areas.  
Changing the Channel Display settings  
From the Channel Display settings you can set/change:  
• the channel position in the channel listing.  
• the tune channel number.  
• the display setting to always display (On), never  
display (Off), or display only when channel  
information is available (Auto Hide).  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
1
2
3
Highlight the ‘Change Channel Display’ item.  
Press ENTER to display the channel editor.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight a channel then  
4
When you’ve made all the settings you want for  
the channel, highlight ‘done’ then press ENTER.  
• To cancel without saving any of the changes you  
made, select cancel.  
Changing the Default Options  
This is the place to change the default settings for  
recordings, reminders and other general settings.  
1
Select the ‘Change Default Options’ item.  
2
Select one of the three default option categories.  
A different menu panel appears for each option:  
General default options  
Info box size – the initial size of the information box  
(no, small, large, last used)  
box cycle – the cycle behavior of the information box  
(no only, small only, large only, no & small, no &  
large, small & large, all)  
press ENTER to go to the Grid Options menu.  
auto guide – Display TV Guide On Screen guide  
automatically when you switch on the recorder (On,  
Off)  
Record defaults  
start – when to start a recording (up to 120 mins  
earlier or later than set, or On time)  
end – when to end a recording (up to 120 mins earlier  
or later than set, or On time)  
recorder – by default, record to DVD or HDD  
quality – recording quality  
Remind defaults  
From the Grid Options menu you can set:  
tune channel – the channel number that the  
channel listing is tuned to  
auto tune – automatically tune to the correct  
channel when a reminder becomes due (On or Off)  
service – the type of service that the channel  
operates on (cable, cable box, etc.)  
when – when to display the reminder (15 mins early  
to 15 mins late, or On time)  
channel – On (display in channel list), Off (don’t  
display) or Auto Hide (hide when no program  
information available  
position – place that the channel appears in the  
channel list  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
3
When you’ve made all the settings you want,  
• I’ve seen the word “download” in reference to the TV  
Guide On Screen system. What does that mean?  
highlight ‘done’ then press ENTER.  
• To cancel without saving any of the changes you  
made, select cancel.  
The recorder downloads channel and show  
information at least once a day. These downloads are  
completely automatic.  
• Can I set a record or remind event without highlighting  
a show title in the program listing?  
TV Guide On Screen FAQ and  
troubleshooting  
Yes. The TV Guide On Screen system has a manual  
Record and Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE  
and then press MENU. Choose Recording or Remind  
as the event type, press ENTER, then enter the  
necessary channel, date and time information.  
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list  
please consult the TV Guide On Screen website at:  
www.tvguideonscreen.com  
• What do the frequencies for record and remind mean?  
FAQ  
Once – records/reminds once only.  
• If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I  
change my setup information?  
Daily (manual only) – records the time, channel,  
input, recorder combination Monday through Friday.  
Highlight Setup service, select Change system  
settings, then follow the on-screen instructions.  
Regularly – records/reminds the show every time the  
show airs on the same channel at the same time.  
• A show entry reads “No listing.” What does that mean?  
Weekly – records/reminds the show every time the  
show airs on the same channel at the same time on  
the same day of the week.  
Show information for that entry was not available  
during the last information update (download). Show  
information is updated daily.  
Off – keeps the show in the list of scheduled  
recordings/reminders, but will not record/remind the  
show until the frequency is changed to one of the  
above. Note that this is not the same as canceling or  
deleting the record/reminder.  
• When I entered the TV Guide On Screen guide, I was  
asked to choose from more than one channel line-up.  
What should I do?  
Select the line-up that most closely matches the one  
for your area. If after you choose the line-up you want  
to make changes to it:  
• How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide On  
Screen guide?  
The Search service lets you find shows by category  
(alphabetical, HDTV, movies, sports, children,  
educational, news, variety, series), or by keyword.  
Highlight Setup service, select Change channel  
display then follow the on-screen instructions.  
• What do the colors for shows in the Listings and  
Search screens indicate?  
Green = sports; dark blue = children’s; purple =  
movies; teal = others.  
• If there’s a power outage, do I have to complete the  
Setup again?  
No. All the setup information will still be stored in the  
TV Guide On Screen system.  
• Is Help available within the TV Guide On Screen guide?  
If so, how do I find it?  
Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,  
Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the  
INFO button. An expanded info box displays  
additional help information. Press INFO again to  
close the box.  
• I’ve noticed some stars displayed after show titles.  
What do they mean?  
These stars are a broadcast industry rating system  
used to inform you of a show’s quality. Four stars is  
the highest rating; one the lowest.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide  
05  
Troubleshooting  
• My listings disappeared after a power failure.  
You should start to receive listings again within 24  
hours.  
• Some channel numbers that appear are incorrect.  
You can correct them using the Change Channel  
Display option under Setup.  
• I haven’t received any program listings.  
Listings usually appear within 24 hours after  
successfully setting up. It may take up to one week to  
receive all eight days of listings. Your recorder must  
be in standby mode to receive listing updates.  
– Check the connections between the recorder,  
cable, antenna and the IR cable if you’re using a  
cable box.  
– Verify the Setup information under Change system  
settings.  
– Make sure that your cable box is switched on (if  
applicable).  
• A show I set to record didn’t record.  
– Make sure the recorder is in standby before the  
recording is due to start.  
– For DVD recording, make sure there is a recordable  
DVD loaded.  
– Check that the recording appears in the Schedule  
listing.  
• The TV Guide On Screen system didn’t automatically  
tune to a show that I set a reminder for.  
– Check that the reminder appears in the Schedule  
listing.  
– If you have a cable box, check the placement of the  
IR cable.  
• I set a reminder with auto-tune, but the channel didn’t  
change.  
– Check the Schedule and make sure that the show  
is listed as a reminder.  
– Highlight the show in the Listings screen, press  
MENU then highlight edit reminder, then press  
ENTER. Make sure that the Auto-tune option reads  
Yes.  
– The TV must be on when the reminder is due for  
automatic channel tuning to work.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
CRhaepcteor 6rding  
About DVD recording  
About HDD recording  
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW  
media. The main difference between the two is that  
DVD-R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW  
can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.  
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very  
flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality  
options, including manual mode, and of course you can  
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.  
Both types of disc can be initialized for Video mode or VR  
mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends  
on what you want to do with the recording which mode  
you choose.  
Important  
• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that  
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99  
respectively. No more recording is possible on the  
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been  
reached.  
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,  
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,  
and changing the way the video is presented.  
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but  
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard  
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title  
is 12 hours.  
1
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).  
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all  
recording on that disc will be in that mode.  
HDD Video mode compatibility  
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in  
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD  
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 95).  
Important  
• The maximum number of titles and chapters that can  
be recorded on a VR mode disc is 99 and 999  
respectively; on a Video mode disc the maximum  
number of titles and chapters is 99 and 99. No more  
recording is possible on a disc that already contains  
the maximum number of chapters/titles.  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from  
HDD to Video mode DVD is possible. When recording a  
broadcast with a Secondary Audio Program (SAP)  
channel, set which channel you want to record from the  
Initial Setup menu (see Dual Mono Recording on  
page 93).  
• Unfinalized Video mode discs are not usable in other  
DVD recorders. Likewise, unfinalized video mode  
discs recorded using other recorders are not usable  
in this recorder.  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,  
high-speed copying isn’t possible. However, when SAP is  
selected as the broadcast audio channel, both the main  
and SAP channels are recorded and you can switch the  
audio on playback.  
• If power to the recorder is cut (due to a power outage,  
the plug being pulled from the power outlet, etc.)  
during recording, editing, initializing, finalizing or  
other operation, some recorded material on the disc,  
or the disc itself, may become unusable. In this case,  
try re-initializing the disc (DVD-RW only), or use a  
new disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost  
recordings, damaged discs or other losses in these  
cases.  
• Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect  
playback and/or recording performance. Please take  
proper care of your discs.  
• See also Disc / content format playback compatibility  
on page 10 for detailed disc compatibility  
information.  
Note  
1.Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for  
VR mode compatibility information.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
The table below shows the different audio output  
possibilities:  
Recording time and picture quality  
There are six preset recording quality modes :  
1
Audio output  
Audio setting  
XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
Left (L)  
L + R  
L
Right (R)  
MONO  
STEREO  
SAP  
L + R  
R
SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most  
applications, gives about two hours of recording time  
on a DVD.  
L + R  
SAP  
LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but  
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four  
hours.  
EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives  
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.  
Restrictions on video recording  
You cannot record copy-protected video using this  
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs  
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material  
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause  
automatically and an error message will be displayed on-  
screen.  
SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but  
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but  
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on the  
HDD or in VR mode (see below).  
Please note that there is a trade-off between recording  
time and quality. The longer the possible recording time,  
the lower the recorded picture quality. You may wish to  
try recording different kinds of programs in different  
recording modes to determine the combination of  
picture quality and recording time that suits your needs.  
We recommend using the XP mode for recording fast-  
moving or action programs.  
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external  
input, you can display copy control information on  
screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on  
page 32).  
CPRM  
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed  
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs.  
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable  
Media.  
In addition to these settings, when Manual Recording is  
On (see Manual Recording on page 95) you can access 32  
different recording quality/time settings (MN1MN32), a  
high-quality audio mode (LPCM), and a super-high  
quality (data transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) HDD  
recording mode (XP+).  
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that  
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you  
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible  
DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or  
higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on the HDD.  
Recorded audio  
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that  
are specifically compatible with CPRM.  
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two  
channel Dolby Digital format. When set to LPCM, sound  
is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM  
format.  
Recording equipment and copyright  
If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel and you are  
recording in Video mode or to the HDD with the HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM  
setting, use the AUDIO button to select the Mono,  
Stereo or SAP audio channel to record before recording  
starts. In other cases, if SAP is selected then both the  
main and SAP audio channels will be recorded and you  
can switch on playback.  
You may use this product only to reproduce or copy  
materials for which you own the copyright or have  
obtained permission to copy from the copyright owner or  
for which you otherwise have a legal right to reproduce or  
copy. Unless you own the copyright or have obtained  
permission from the copyright owner or otherwise have a  
legal right to reproduce or copy, you may be violating the  
law, including copyright law, and may be subject to  
payment of damages and other remedies.  
Note  
1.All recording times (both in this manual and those shown by the recorder) are approximate. This is because of the way that the video is re-  
corded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what you’re recording.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of  
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property  
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other  
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
Basic recording from the TV  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.  
Recording starts immediately and continues until the  
disc is full or you stop the recording.  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
HDD  
DVD  
Setting the picture quality/recording  
time  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
CH  
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set  
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard  
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance  
between picture quality and recording time.  
CLEAR  
AUDIO  
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual  
Recording on page 95), a further option will be available  
(MN132, LPCM or XP+, depending on what you set).  
ENTER  
See also Recording time and picture quality on page 50 for  
more information.  
PAUSE  
REC MODE  
REC  
STOP REC REC MODE  
ì
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording  
setting.  
XP – High quality  
SP – Standard play  
LP – Long play  
DVD RECORDER  
EP – Extended play  
SLP – Super Long play  
SEP – Super Extended play  
1
Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive  
or a recordable DVD respectively.  
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if  
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder  
takes a short while to initialize the disc).  
1
2
MN / LPCM / XP+ – Manual / Linear PCM / XP+  
(available only when manual recording is on)  
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and  
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a  
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the  
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is  
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting  
(see On-Screen Display on page 96) is Off then this  
information is not displayed.)  
2
Use the CH +/– buttons to select the TV channel  
to record.  
The front panel display shows the channel number:  
Channel number  
Note  
1.Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a broadcast with a SAP channel, select which  
audio channel to record (see Dual Mono Recording on page 93).  
2.Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are  
always copied in real time.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the  
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.  
(For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER; for channel 24,  
press 2, 4 then ENTER)  
Simultaneous recording and  
playback  
VR mode  
HDD  
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the ꢀ/ꢁ  
buttons on the front panel to select the channel  
number.  
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a  
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the  
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For  
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of  
a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start  
watching the movie, from the beginning, while the  
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.  
3
Use the REC MODE button to set the picture  
quality/recording time.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above  
for detailed instructions.  
4
If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel (Second  
Audio Program), press AUDIO to select the audio  
channel to record.  
Press repeatedly to switch between Mono, Stereo and  
SAP audio channels.  
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording  
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the  
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator  
screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD on page 58).  
• When recording in VR mode (DVD) or with HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (HDD), both  
mono and SAP audio channels are recorded,  
allowing you to switch the audio channel on  
playback. The only exception to this is when the  
picture quality is set to LPCM, in which case you do  
need to select the audio channel before recording.  
Important  
• Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or  
Ver. 1.2 disc to be able to use this feature.  
• You may not be able to use this feature with a  
DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another  
recorder.  
5
Press ì REC to start recording.  
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC  
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30  
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The  
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the  
front panel display. When the recording ends, the  
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other  
operation is being performed.  
• Chase playback is not possible using a VR mode  
DVD-R disc.  
During recording, press PLAY to start playback  
1
from the beginning of the current recording , or  
press DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to  
play from there.  
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.  
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as  
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.  
2
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press  
PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If  
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter  
is started after recording restarts)  
• To stop playback, press STOP (recording will  
continue).  
• To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will  
continue).  
6
To stop the recording, press STOP REC.  
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you  
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ  
STOP REC.  
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no  
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of  
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).  
Note  
1.You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.  
2.When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning discs on page 60).  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
3
4
Set up the recorder.  
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See  
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 51  
for detailed information.  
Recording from an external  
component  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to  
record to a DVD.  
You can record from an external component, such as a  
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s  
external inputs.  
Press ì REC when you’re ready to start  
recording.  
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN  
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also  
pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.  
• If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,  
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on  
video recording on page 50 for more details.  
HDD  
DVD  
INPUT  
SELECT  
Recording from a DV camcorder  
DVR-633/533H-S only  
CLEAR  
AUDIO  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the  
DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the  
recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder  
and this recorder.  
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the  
DV IN jack is setup (see DV Input on page 93).  
REC  
REC MODE  
ì
HDD  
DVD  
1
Make sure that the component you want to  
record from is connected properly to the DVD  
recorder.  
CLEAR  
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.  
AUDIO  
2
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of  
the external inputs to record from.  
There are three analog inputs and a DV digital input. The  
current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel  
display:  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
L1 – Input 1  
L2 – Input 2 (front panel)  
L3 – Input 3  
REV SCAN  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
PAUSE STOP  
DV – DV input (front panel – DVR-633/533H-S only)  
STEP/SLOW  
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio,  
Dual Mono Recording and DV Input are as you want  
them (see Audio In Settings on page 93).  
REC MODE  
ì
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or  
stretched), adjust on the source component or your  
TV before recording.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this  
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the  
, , , , , and buttons.  
Important  
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format  
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this  
recorder’s remote.  
7
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Start Rec’ and  
press ENTER.  
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,  
you cannot control the second unit from this one.  
Stop  
1.02.22  
Stop  
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a  
component connected to the DV IN jack.  
Control with these  
Start Rec  
Pause Rec  
Stop Rec  
buttons  
• You can’t record date and time information from DV  
cassette.  
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or  
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will  
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically  
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is  
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will  
stop recording and the camcorder should stop  
(depending on the camcorder).  
HDD  
Rem.  
SP (2h00m/DVD)  
32h45m  
• Recording is automatically paused if the recorder  
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.  
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-  
protected signal.  
• For best results when recording from a DV  
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing  
the camcorder to the place you want to start  
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-  
pause.  
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting  
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.  
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote  
control during recording.  
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,  
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not  
be recorded. Use the pause button on your  
camcorder instead and recording will start  
immediately.  
1
Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to  
the front panel DV IN jack.  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
2
Set up the recorder.  
HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker  
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode  
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is  
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.  
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See  
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 51  
for detailed information.  
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to  
record to DVD.  
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording  
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.  
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV  
audio input is setup as you require.  
See DV Input on page 93 for more on this.  
• See also DV-related messages on page 104 if you  
encounter an error while using the DV IN jack.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External  
Audio and Dual Mono Recording are as you want  
them (see Audio In Settings on page 93).  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!  
4
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘DV  
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also  
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not  
copy-protected.  
Record’ from the menu.  
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder  
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.  
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder  
then switch back on.  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or ‘Record to  
DVD’ to record to the hard disk drive or a recordable  
DVD respectively.  
• There’s a picture, but no sound!  
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape that you  
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on  
page 93) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.  
want to start recording from.  
For best results, pause playback at the point from which  
1
you want to record.  
Note  
1.If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually  
from the External Audio setting (page 93).  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
Select ‘Finalize’.  
Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players  
Disc Setup  
VR mode Video mode  
Next Screen  
Start  
Basic  
Finalize  
Initialize  
Undo Finalize  
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs  
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including  
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs  
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will  
not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-  
ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to  
(finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that  
came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will  
play.  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
4
Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then  
‘Next Screen’.  
5
For Video mode discs only, select a title menu  
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is  
created from which you can select titles when you play  
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title  
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.  
style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to  
cancel.  
The menu you select will be the one that appears when  
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.  
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,  
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then  
using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ followed by ENTER to select titles  
and start playback.  
Finalize  
TITLE MENU  
Finalizing a disc  
VR mode Video mode  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc  
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer  
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer  
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.  
These discs will have only a text title menu when  
finalized on this recorder.  
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after  
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you  
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed  
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc  
Name on page 87 before starting the steps below.  
6
The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.  
During finalization:  
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW disc is going  
to take more than around four minutes, you can  
press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before  
completion, the option to cancel disappears.  
Important  
• Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,  
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.  
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe  
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 88 for how to do  
this.  
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R  
disc.  
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of  
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the  
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR  
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc  
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.  
• A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on  
this recorder even after finalizing.  
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.  
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before  
proceeding.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Initializing a recordable DVD disc  
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will  
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also  
manually initialize discs for either Video mode recording  
1
or VR mode recording.  
By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs  
for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 95  
if you want to change the default to Video mode.  
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of  
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode  
recording, you must do it before recording anything else  
on the disc.  
Important  
• Initializing a DVD-RW disc will erase everything  
recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc  
that you want to keep!  
• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in  
a different format if it was originally initialized on an  
older DVD recorder.  
• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-  
initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.  
1
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
Select ‘Initialize’  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Start  
Basic  
VR Mode  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Video Mode  
Optimize HDD  
3
Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the  
initialize options.  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.  
Initializing Disc  
2ch  
1 min left  
Note  
1.If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
CPhlaapteyr b7 ack  
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the  
opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched  
discs may not be playable.  
Introduction  
Most of the features described in this chapter make use  
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/  
and ENTER. To go back one level from any screen, use  
the RETURN button. Remember also that the button  
guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons  
do what.  
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio  
content will not play.  
For more detailed information on the DualDisc  
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or  
disc retailer.  
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the  
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, WMA/MP3 discs and CDs,  
although the exact operation of some varies slightly with  
the kind of disc loaded. The following icons are provided  
to help you quickly identify which instructions you need  
for which kind of disc.  
Navigating discs and the HDD  
ALL  
During playback you can easily jump to another title,  
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on  
the remote.  
DVD  
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW  
DVD-Video  
Commercially produced DVD or finalized  
Video mode DVD-R/RW  
Video mode  
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)  
VR mode  
VR mode DVD-R/RW  
CLEAR  
HDD  
HDD  
CD  
Audio CD  
ENTER  
Video CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
WMA or MP3 files  
DVD-Video Video mode  
1
During playback use the number buttons to  
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback  
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This  
is not a malfunction.  
enter a chapter number within the current title.  
For example, for chapter 6, press 6; for chapter 24,  
press 2, then 4.  
• When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as  
making a program list, are not available in PBC  
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by  
pressing .  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
will jump to the new chapter.  
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The  
PhotoViewer on page 85.  
HDD  
About DualDisc playback  
1
During playback, use the number buttons to  
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains  
DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other side contains  
non-DVD content such as digital audio material.  
input a title number.  
For example, for title 6, press 6; for title 24, press 2,  
then 4.  
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the  
CD Audio specification and therefore may not play.  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
2
1
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
will jump to the new title.  
3
Use the ꢀ/buttons to browse up and down the  
list of titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 4ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
9
8
7
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9ch SP  
During playback, use the number buttons to  
input a track number.  
For example, for track 6, press 6; for track 24, press 2,  
then 4.  
Recent First  
All Genres  
2h00m(1.0G)  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM 7ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
1h00m(1.0G)  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
• Use the ꢌ/ꢍ buttons to display the previous/  
next page of titles, if there are more titles than can fit  
on to the screen.  
will jump to the new track.  
• You can change the style and order in which titles are  
displayed from the view options menu. See below for  
more on this.  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse  
the contents of a disc.  
• You can change the thumbnail picture displayed for  
a title; see Set Thumbnail on page 79.  
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc  
and start playback.  
4
To play the highlighted title, press ENTER.  
• You can also select Play from the command menu  
options.  
HDD  
DVD  
Tip  
• Use the time search feature to find a particular point  
on a DVD or within a title on the HDD. See Search  
Mode on page 61 for more information.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
Changing the display style of the Disc  
Navigator  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in  
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by  
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose  
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the  
same time.  
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD  
1
From the Disc Navigator’s title list, press to  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
display the view options panel.  
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video  
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view  
information on titles.  
The View Options panel  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
See also Editing on page 76 for more on editing  
recordable discs.  
10Titles  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
Style  
4
12/3FRI 11:00PM  
4ch  
SP  
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or  
Sort order  
7
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM  
9ch  
SP  
Recent First  
DVD.  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Genre  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM  
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’  
All Genres  
7ch  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
from the on-screen display.  
Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go  
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
2ch  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Style’, ‘Sort  
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only  
discs  
Order’ or ‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the  
available view options.  
DVD-Video  
CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
from the on-screen display.  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD or WMA/MP3 disc, you  
can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to  
the Disc Navigator screen.  
Style  
4
Titles  
Titles  
8
2h00m(1.0G)
Sort
Cancel  
Re
7
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Genr
2
Select what you want to play.  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM 7ch SP  
A
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to highlight items and ENTER to  
select.  
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc  
Navigator looks slightly different.  
Sort Order – Sort by date (most recent first),  
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest  
first)  
• When a DVD is loaded, titles are shown on the left,  
chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter  
within a title.  
1
• When a CD or Video CD is loaded, a list of the tracks  
is displayed.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
Style  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Recent first  
• When a WMA/MP3 disc is loaded, a list of folders and  
tracks is displayed (as shown below). Select a folder  
or a track within a folder.  
New first  
2h00m(1.0G)
By title  
By rec.date  
Sort
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Re
Cancel  
Genr
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM 7ch SP  
A
Disc Navigator  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Folder (01-03)  
01.Rock  
Track(001-004)  
001.Intro  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
CD  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
WMA/MP3  
02.Pop  
002.Escape  
1h00m(1.0G)  
03.Dance  
003.Everything You Say  
004.What I Do  
Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
Styl
12/3FRI 11:00PM 4ch SP  
All Genres  
No Category  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
2h00m(1.0G)
Free1  
Sort
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and  
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area  
between CD and WMA/MP3. This can only be done  
while the disc is stopped.  
Free2  
Re
Free3  
Free4  
Free5  
Genr
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM 7ch SP  
A
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
1h00m(1.0G)  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select an option, then  
press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to the new  
display preferences.  
4
Press to return to the title list.  
Note  
1.It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD in PBC mode.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
Scanning discs  
Playing in slow motion  
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or  
DVD  
HDD  
Video CD  
1
backward.  
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs  
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in  
either direction, while Video CDs can only be played  
REV SCAN  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
3
forwards in slow motion.  
1
During playback, press or to start  
PLAY  
reverse or forward scanning.  
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.  
2
Press the same button repeatedly to increase the  
STEP/SLOW  
scanning speed.  
DVD  
HDD  
1
Press or to start slow motion reverse or  
Forward:  
forward playback.  
SCAN 1 (1.5x Quick View) SCAN 2 SCAN 3 ꢄ  
SCAN 4  
2
Press the same button repeatedly to change the  
Reverse:  
slow motion speed.  
2
Reverse play SCAN 1 SCAN 2 SCAN 3  
SCAN 4  
SLOW 1/16  
SLOW 1/2  
SLOW 1/8  
SLOW 1/4  
CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
3
To resume normal playback, press PLAY.  
Forward/Reverse:  
SCAN 1 SCAN 2  
3
To resume normal playback, press PLAY.  
Note  
1.• Only analog audio is output when scanning audio CDs.  
• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs.  
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output  
from the optical digital output, Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback) No sound is output when using other  
scan speeds.  
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during  
forward SCAN 1).  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.  
2.Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth.  
3.• The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played.  
• Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.  
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
Frame advance/frame reverse  
HDD  
DVD  
DVD  
HDD  
Video CD  
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the  
HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CDs, you can only use  
1
frame advance.  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
PLAY MODE  
PLAY  
ENTER  
PAUSE  
STEP/SLOW  
PLAY  
1
2
During playback, press PAUSE.  
Press or to back up or advance one frame.  
• Hold down or for continuous frame reverse/  
frame advance.  
1
Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu  
screen.  
Play Mode  
3
To resume normal playback, press PLAY.  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Chapter Search  
Program  
The Play Mode menu  
ALL  
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the  
Home Menu (press HOME MENU).  
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search  
functions, repeat and program play functions.  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to navigate.  
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or  
PLAY MODE.  
Important  
• You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CDs  
playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is  
being displayed. For other restrictions, see the  
following sections.  
Search Mode  
ALL  
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a  
2
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/  
folder/track number.  
1
2
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.  
Select one of the search options.  
Note  
1.• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.  
2.When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
3
Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/  
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from  
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be  
in the same title.  
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,  
minutes & seconds).  
4
To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the  
Play Mode  
A-B Repeat menu.  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Input Time  
0.00.00  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play  
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
Program  
Repeat play  
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes  
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15  
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.  
ALL  
There are various repeat play options, depending on the  
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for  
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together  
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the  
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and  
30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.  
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,  
press 6. Alternatively, you can use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons.  
2
program list (see Program play on page 63).  
1
2
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.  
Select a repeat play mode.  
4
Press ENTER.  
Tip  
Play Mode  
Repeat Disc  
Repeat Title  
Repeat Chapter  
Repeat Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
• You can often select what you want to watch on a  
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP  
MENU to display the disc menu.  
Program  
A-B Repeat  
DVD  
CD  
Video CD  
HDD  
VR mode  
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points  
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is  
played over and over.  
• For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat  
Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off).  
1
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the  
DVD-Video Video mode  
HDD  
Play Mode menu.  
• For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,  
select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat  
Off).  
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at  
the point you want the loop to start.  
Play Mode  
A (Loop Start)  
B (Loop End)  
Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
CD  
Video CD  
• For CDs and Video CDs, select Repeat Disc or  
Program  
Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).  
WMA/MP3  
After setting the loop start point, the highlight will  
automatically move down to B (Loop End).  
• For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat  
Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).  
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at  
the point you want the loop to end.  
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and  
plays the loop round and round.  
Note  
1.• If you switch camera angles during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.  
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 discs.  
2.If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
3
To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’  
CD or Video CD: Select a track to add to the program list.  
from the Repeat Play menu.  
Program  
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no  
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
Step  
01.04  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Track (01-10)  
Track 01  
Track 02  
Track 03  
Track 04  
Track 05  
Track 06  
Track 07  
Track 08  
Total Time 0.00.00  
Program play  
DVD-Video  
HDD  
CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/  
chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.  
WMA/MP3: You can add a whole folder, or a track within  
a folder to the program list.  
1
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.  
• To add a folder, select the folder.  
• To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press ꢃ  
and select a track from the list.  
2
Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of  
program options.  
Program  
Play Mode  
Step  
01.01  
02.  
03.  
04.  
Folder (01-03)  
01.Rock  
02.Pop  
Track(001-004)  
001.Intro  
002.Escape  
003.Everything You Say  
004.What I Do  
Input/Edit Program  
Start Program Play  
Cancel Program Play  
Erase Program List  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Program  
03.Dance  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the  
kind of disc loaded.  
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/  
track, the step number automatically moves down one.  
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a  
list of titles (DVD, HDD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks  
(CD, Video CDs). On the far right is a list of chapters  
(DVD, HDD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).  
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the  
step number where you want to insert another step,  
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After  
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move  
down one.  
3
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the  
current step in the program list.  
DVD or HDD: You can add a whole title, or a chapter  
within a title to the program list.  
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the  
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.  
• To add a title, select the title.  
4
Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.  
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press  
and select a chapter from the list.  
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/  
folders/tracks.  
5
To play the program list, press PLAY.  
Program  
Step  
01.001  
02.  
Title (01-03)  
Title 01  
Title 02  
Chapter(001-015)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
Chapter 004  
Chapter 005  
Chapter 006  
Chapter 007  
Chapter 008  
Program play remains active until you turn off program  
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject  
the disc or switch off the recorder.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Title 03  
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start  
playback of the program list then select Program  
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see  
Repeat play on page 62).  
Note  
1.When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on  
the disc.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
1
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle  
Tip  
option.  
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display.  
• To save your program list and exit the program edit  
screen without starting playback, press HOME  
MENU or PLAY MODE.  
• You can change the program list by selecting Input/  
Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu.  
Subtitle: 1/2 English  
• During program play, press to skip to the next  
program step.  
The toucan lives in tropical forests  
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program  
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is  
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program  
list.  
2
To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then  
CLEAR.  
Other Program play functions  
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can  
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the  
program list from the Play Mode menu.  
Switching DVD soundtracks  
DVD-Video  
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the  
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more  
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can  
switch the soundtrack during playback.  
list of functions on the left.  
2
2
Select a program play function.  
Input/Edit Program – See above  
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack  
options.  
Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved  
program list  
Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but  
does not erase the program list  
AUDIO  
Erase Program List – Erases the program list and  
turns off program play  
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio  
soundtrack.  
Displaying and switching subtitles  
DVD-Video  
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more  
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which  
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle  
Audio : 1/2  
Dolby Digital 2/0CH  
1
language during playback.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle  
options.  
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when  
switching soundtracks.  
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS  
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when  
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,  
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/  
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital  
output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver  
on page 19 for connection details.  
CLEAR  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
Note  
1.• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access.  
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 94.  
2.• Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access.  
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 94.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
Switching audio channels  
Switching camera angles  
VR mode  
HDD  
CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
DVD-Video  
1
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or  
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be  
For HDD or VR mode content that has both a main and  
a SAP (Secondary Audio Program) audio channel, you  
2
marked with a  
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.  
can switch between main (L), SAP (R), or both (L+R).  
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon  
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are  
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see  
Angle Indicator on page 96).  
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch  
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right  
channel.  
AUDIO  
ANGLE  
MENU  
AUDIO  
TOP MENU  
1
To display/switch the audio channel, press  
AUDIO repeatedly.  
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-  
screen.  
To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.  
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.  
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the  
new angle.  
VR mode  
HDD  
• Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while  
repeat playback is active.  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left/main channel only  
R – Right/SAP channel only  
• You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video  
disc menus. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access.  
CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
Stereo – Stereo (default)  
1/L – Left channel only  
2/R – Right channel only  
Note  
1.Only when HDD Video Mode is set to Off. See also HDD Recording Format on page 95.  
2.When playing a Dual Mono recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot  
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 93) or listen via the analog outputs  
if you need to switch the audio channel.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
CChaoptpery8 ing and back-up  
You can identify copy-once protected material during  
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the  
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark  
( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 34).  
Introduction  
Use the copying features of this recorder to:  
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to  
a DVD.  
Copyright  
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play  
in another player.  
You may use this product only to reproduce or copy  
materials for which you own the copyright or have  
obtained permission to copy from the copyright owner or  
for which you otherwise have a legal right to reproduce or  
copy. Unless you own the copyright or have obtained  
permission from the copyright owner or otherwise have a  
legal right to reproduce or copy, you may be violating the  
law, including copyright law, and may be subject to  
payment of damages and other remedies.  
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.  
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.  
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch  
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title  
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on  
page 66 for detailed instructions.  
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a  
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only  
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 67  
for detailed instructions.  
One Touch Copy  
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at  
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind  
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be  
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum  
copying times on page 100 for more on copying times.  
(Please note that additional time is required for  
initializing and finalizing a disc.)  
* See also Copyright above.  
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing  
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or  
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of  
where in the title you start the copy.  
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording  
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in  
whatever recording mode is currently set.  
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a  
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on  
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is  
always done in real-time.  
Make sure that a recordable DVD-R/RW disc is loaded  
when trying to copy from the HDD.  
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode  
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not  
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at  
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting  
(see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 95).  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
1
If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD, use the  
Restrictions on copying  
REC MODE button to select a recording mode.  
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title  
playing will not result in a better quality recording.  
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means  
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely  
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected  
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode  
disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher (see CPRM  
on page 50 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-  
once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and  
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it  
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-  
once protected).  
2
During playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to  
copy the current title.  
The front panel display indicates that the title is being  
copied.  
• High-speed copying is used when copying from the  
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.  
• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to  
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the  
title.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
Canceling One Touch Copy  
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.  
Using Copy Lists  
* See also Copyright on page 66.  
Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than  
a second.  
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD  
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to  
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,  
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for  
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not  
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content  
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify  
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the  
actual content is not being altered.  
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is  
erased.  
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space  
available for recording does not return to the pre-  
copy figure.  
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy  
Copying to DVD  
Copying from HDD to DVD  
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail  
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also  
copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/  
RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied.  
Important  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly  
the same positions as the original when recording on  
to a Video mode disc.  
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 98) will erase the Copy  
List.  
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a  
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.  
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be  
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode disc for  
this type of material.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
1
RETURN  
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes ) widescreen  
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a  
VR mode disc for this type of material.  
• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode  
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN915 modes cannot be  
high-speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use  
a VR mode disc.  
PREV  
NEXT  
• Recordings of dual mono broadcasts cannot be high-  
speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR  
mode disc.  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.  
XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD at high-speed.  
Copying to the HDD  
• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.  
Disc Navigator  
TV GUIDE  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Copy  
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,  
except when copying from a finalized Video mode  
disc.  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Photo Viewer  
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for  
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in  
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.  
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-  
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected  
portions will not be copied.  
Note  
1.In manual recording mode these equate to MN1–15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1–11 (Video Mode On).  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
2
Select ‘HDD DVD’.  
5
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight titles you want  
If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 4  
below.  
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to  
the Copy List.  
10 Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Return  
Next  
HDD DVD  
DVD HDD  
Disc Back-up  
DV Record  
Recent first  
All Genres  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
3
If there is already a Copy List stored in the  
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’  
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.  
If you select Use Existing Copy List, skip to step 8 below.  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in  
pink.  
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to  
the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD:  
Copy  
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected  
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.  
Use Existng Copy List  
Create New Cppy List  
• When adding titles that contain material of more  
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a  
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title  
if high-speed copying is possible.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy  
List already stored in the recorder.  
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying may not be  
possible to a Video mode disc.  
4
Select VR mode or Video mode for the copy.  
6
Press to display the command menu panel.  
For certain kinds of material you must use VR mode; for  
greater compatibility with other players, use Video mode.  
The Command Menu panel  
10 Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD  
DVD (Video mode)  
Copy  
HDD DVD  
Select Recording Format  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
11/29 MON 11/29Mon 7:00PM  
2ch  
2ch  
2ch  
2ch  
2ch  
2ch  
2ch  
2ch  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
Return  
Please select the recording format for the disc.  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Copying of bilingual broadcasts and  
copy-once protected material  
is possible.  
VR Mode  
Next  
11/29Mon 7:00PM  
7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G)  
2ch  
SP  
Video Mode  
High compatibility mode. Must be final-  
ized for playback on other equipment.  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
Note  
1.• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1–15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1–11 (Video Mode On).  
LP/MN915 recordings when HDD Recording Mode is set to Video Mode Off.  
• Dual mono recordings.  
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.  
XP+ titles.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.  
Cancel – Exit the Copy List screen without saving any  
changes.  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need  
editing.  
1
2
3
11/29Mon7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Return  
Next  
9
Press to display the command menu panel.  
10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G)  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1
2
3
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
Return  
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the ꢀ/ꢁ  
Next  
buttons, then press ENTER.  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G)  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
1
2
3
11/29Mon7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Return  
Next  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the  
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 73).  
Erase  
Title Name  
Erase Section  
Move  
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the  
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a  
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc.  
(The input method is similar to that of naming titles;  
see Title Name on page 70.)  
Preview  
n 7:00PM 2ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Cancel  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
A menu of editing commands appears:  
• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
1
Video mode DVD after copying. Select a title menu  
page 70).  
style from the following screen.  
Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List  
(see page 70).  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video Mode)  
DVD-RW  
Start Copy  
Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see page 71).  
HDD  
Return  
Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see page 71).  
Recording Mode  
Input Disc Name  
Finalize  
Copy Time 0h00m  
Recording Mode  
Disc Name  
SP  
Off  
Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List  
(see page 72).  
Finalize  
Start Copy  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see  
page 72).  
11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.  
Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into  
one (see page 72).  
Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title  
(see page 72):  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two.  
Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the  
chapter order.  
Combine – Combine two chapters into one.  
Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title  
(see page 73).  
Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy  
(see page 73).  
Dual Mono Audio – Set how dual mono audio  
should be copied when copying from HDD to Video  
mode DVD (see page 74).  
Note  
1.If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
8
9
Press to display the command menu panel.  
Copying from DVD to HDD  
Important  
Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the  
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 73).  
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when  
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you  
can still use the One Touch Copy function (See One  
Touch Copy on page 66).  
10 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.  
Erase  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
Use this command to erase individual titles from the  
Copy List.  
• The Copy List will be erased if:  
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or  
edited.  
– the disc tray is opened.  
– playback is switched between Play List and  
Original.  
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.  
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 98).  
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to erase.  
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
Erase ?  
!
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that  
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.  
Yes  
No  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.  
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.  
Tip  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when  
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing  
ENTER.  
If there is already a Copy List stored in the  
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’  
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy  
List already stored in the recorder.  
Title Name  
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy  
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).  
When copying to a Video mode disc, the name length is  
limited to 40 characters; for a VR mode disc, the limit is  
64 characters.  
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight titles you want  
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to  
the Copy List.  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in  
pink.  
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or  
5
6
7
Press to display the command menu panel.  
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.  
To edit a title, highlight it using the ꢀ/ꢁ  
rename).  
2
Select ‘Title Name’ from the command menu  
panel.  
buttons, then press ENTER.  
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
Input Title Name  
page 70).  
11/04Wed 12:30PM 2ch LP  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see page 71).  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
_
&
~
}
Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List  
(see page 72).  
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
/2  
/4  
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
Cancel – Exit the Copy List screen without saving any  
changes.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need  
editing.  
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.  
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/  
).  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls  
(, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section  
to erase, then press ENTER.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
shows the start of the section.  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name on page 79.  
Erase Section (HDD Copy)  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
4ch XP  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
name and return to the Copy List.  
Play Pause  
From  
• To return to the main Copy List screen without saving  
changes to the title name, press RETURN.  
To  
Exit  
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the  
Erase Section  
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end  
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.  
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List  
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a  
recording made from the TV.  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
1
Highlight the title containing the section you  
press ENTER.  
want to erase.  
Erase ?  
2
Select ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu  
!
panel.  
Yes  
No  
The Erase Section screen appears from which you can  
mark the start and end points of the section to erase.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
3
Select the type of edit.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Move  
Use this command to change the order of titles in the  
Copy List.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
1
Highlight the title you want to move and press  
ENTER.  
2
3
Select ‘Move’ from the command menu panel.  
Move the insert bar to the new position for the  
Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
title and press ENTER.  
Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
Title to move  
Insertion position  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 77  
1
2
3
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Return  
Next  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
Preview  
Combine  
Use this command to check what’s in a title.  
Use this command to make a single title from two titles  
in the Copy List. The second title selected will be  
appended to the first.  
1
Highlight the title you want to preview.  
2
Select ‘Preview’ from the command menu panel.  
1
Highlight the title you want to combine with  
The selected title starts to play. Use any of the usual  
playback controls to scan, skip, play in slow-motion, etc.  
another, then press ENTER.  
This title will not move. The next title you select will be  
appended to this one.  
3
To get back to the Copy List, press RETURN.  
2
3
Select ‘Combine’ from the command menu panel.  
Select the title you want to append to the first,  
Divide  
Use this command to make two titles from a title already  
in the Copy List.  
then press ENTER.  
This title will effectively move to be added to the end of the  
first title. In the example belowe, title 3 will be appended  
to title 1.  
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to divide.  
Select ‘Divide’ from the command menu panel.  
Select the type of edit.  
This title will not move  
This title will be appended  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
DVD RECORDER  
!
1
2
3
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Return  
Next  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
OK to combine titles  
1 and 3 ?  
!
Yes  
No  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 77  
Chapter Edit  
4
Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several  
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a  
Copy List title.  
find the place you want to divide the title.  
Divide Title (HDD Copy)  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
4ch XP  
1
Highlight the title that contains the chapters you  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
want to edit.  
2
Select ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu  
5–1  
00.00.09.15  
panel.  
Play Pause  
Divide  
Cancel  
3
Select the type of editing.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
5
Press ENTER to divide the title at the current  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
playback position.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
Set Thumbnail  
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in  
the four-title display of the Disc Navigator for a title to any  
frame that appears in that title.  
Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
1
Highlight the title you want to change the  
thumbnail picture for.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 77  
2
Select ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command menu  
panel.  
4
Select the command you want:  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you  
can find the frame you want.  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use  
the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the  
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then  
press ENTER.  
3
Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.  
You can also use the chapter and time search features  
(press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP buttons.  
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
Rec. time 1h00m  
4ch XP  
Chapters  
10  
Set Thumbnail (HDD Copy)  
1–1  
Play  
0.00.00  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
4ch XP  
Exit  
Divide  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as  
you wish (up to 99 per title).  
Play Pause  
OK  
Exit  
Erase/Move – Erase or move chapters: Select the  
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.  
Select whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Copy List screen.  
Move command only: Select the destination for the  
chapter, and press ENTER.  
Recording Mode  
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the command  
1
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)  
menu panel.  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
Rec. time 1h00m  
Erase  
Move  
Chapter  
0h01m  
Cancel  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a recording mode  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
for the copy.  
1
Exit  
Divide  
High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
same recording quality as the original.  
2
XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy List is  
Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:  
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent  
chapters and press ENTER.  
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.  
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than  
the original, the copy will not be better quality than  
the original.)  
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
Rec. time 1h00m  
4ch XP  
If you select MN above, you can also change the level  
setting (MN1MN32, LPCM or XP+ ) from the  
3
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Recording Quality box that appears.  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
2,4  
Optimized – The recording quality is automatically  
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space  
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-  
time.  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Copy List  
screen.  
Note  
1.When copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.  
2.When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers of the original  
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)  
on page 95).  
3.XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.  
4.Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
When you change the recording mode setting, you can  
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more  
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able  
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording  
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List  
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.  
3
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and  
load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then  
close the disc tray.  
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video  
mode discs.  
Disc Back-up  
3
Press ENTER.  
No Disc.  
Please load a disc to be backed-up.  
Dual Mono Audio  
Select the title containing the audio you want to  
Cancel  
Start  
1
change.  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
2
Select ‘Dual Mono Audio’ from the command  
Disc Back-up  
menu panel.  
Read from disc and save to HDD.  
Start reading?  
3
Use the ꢀ/buttons to select a dual mono audio  
option.  
Cancel  
Start  
4
Press ENTER.  
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.  
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE  
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.  
Using disc back-up  
* See also Copyright on page 66.  
5
When the data has been copied, press OPEN/  
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy  
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to  
the hard disk drive , then on to another recordable DVD  
CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and  
load a blank* recordable DVD.  
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be  
blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be  
erased in the back-up process.  
1
disc.  
1
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc Back-  
up’.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.  
Please eject the disc and load a  
recordable disc  
2
Select a back-up option.  
Disc Back-up  
Cancel  
Start  
Start new disc back-up  
Resume writing date  
Erase back-up date  
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 disc, or DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or  
Ver. 1.2 for the back-up.  
• If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot  
undo the finalization later.  
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may  
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re  
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If  
this happens, please try another brand of disc.  
There are three back-up options:  
Start new disc back-up – Start making a back-up of  
a disc.  
Resume writing data – Record the back-up data  
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.  
Erase back-up data – Erase the back-up data on the  
HDD.  
Note  
1.It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
08  
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data  
to the blank disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.  
The disc contents will be overwritten.  
OK to start?  
Cancel  
Start  
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.  
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE  
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,  
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are  
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order  
to make it usable again—see Initializing a recordable  
DVD disc on page 56.)  
7
After the recorder has finished recording the  
back-up disc, you can select whether to make  
another back-up of the same data or exit.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc back-up finished.  
To make another back-up copy, please load  
a recordable disc.  
Cancel  
Start  
• Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel  
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,  
return to step 6 above.  
8
If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on  
the HDD, you can delete it now.  
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to  
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).  
Disc Back-up  
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.  
Erasing it will increase the free space  
available. OK to Erase?  
No  
Yes  
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,  
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD  
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
CEhdapitetri9ng  
View options panel  
Title list  
The Disc Navigator screen  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video  
content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD  
Title list style  
Title list order  
12/3FRI 11:00PM  
4ch  
SP  
Selected  
title  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
9
8
7
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM  
9ch  
SP  
1
Recent First  
All Genres  
2h00m(1.0G)  
discs , as well as video content on the internal hard disk  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM  
Genre  
selection  
7ch  
SP  
drive.  
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM  
HDD  
SP  
2ch  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Available  
recording time  
Title thumbnail Title information Command  
menu panel  
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the  
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Disc  
Navigator then press ENTER).  
HDD  
DVD  
• From the title list, press to display the command  
menu panel. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER buttons to  
navigate the menus.  
AUDIO  
• When in the title list, use the PREV () and NEXT  
() buttons to display the previous/next page if  
there are more titles than can be displayed.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
• Press DISPLAY to change the title information  
ENTER  
displayed in the title list.  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• If you are editing a VR mode disc you can display the  
Play List by selecting Play List from the view options  
panel (press , then select Play List from the view  
options, then Play List).  
DISPLAY  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
PREV  
NEXT  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Style  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
PlayList  
Original  
• You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc  
Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons  
(front panel or remote).  
Titles on the HDD marked with a  
icon are recently  
recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.  
DVD RECORDER  
3
To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU.  
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or  
the DVD.  
2
Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc  
Navigator screen.  
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.  
Note  
1.It isn’t possible to edit video on DVD-RAM discs using this recorder.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Command menu panel options  
The table below shows which commands you can use with which video type.  
VR mode  
(Original)  
VR mode  
(Play List)  
HDD  
Video mode  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Create (page 78)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Play (page 78)  
Erase (page 78)  
Edit > Title Name (page 78)  
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 79)  
Edit > Erase Section (page 80)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Edit > Divide (page 80)  
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 81)  
Edit > Set Genre (page 82)  
Edit > Lock (page 82)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Edit > Move (page 82)  
Edit > Combine (page 83)  
Genre Name (page 83)  
Multi-Mode (page 83)  
Undo (page 84)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Editing accuracy  
HDD genres  
Some editing (and Copy List) commands ask you  
whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or  
frame accuracy (Video mode compatible editing, or Frame  
accurate editing).  
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be  
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize  
your HDD video content you can assign different genres  
to titles. There are five genres (set initially to FREE15)  
that can be named and renamed as you like.  
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is  
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this  
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use  
the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD.  
Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit  
point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5–1  
second. On the other hand, these edit points will be  
preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video  
mode DVD.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Create  
Erase  
VR mode  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
Play List only  
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.  
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.  
Before you can use this command, make sure that the  
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the  
left.  
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles  
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space  
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode  
DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only  
if it is the last title on the disc.  
1
Select ‘Create’ from the command menu panel.  
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R, VR mode  
or Video mode, will not result in any more free space on  
the disc.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
Play  
No title  
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to erase.  
Play List  
Create  
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.  
Undo  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
DVD  
VR Mode  
press ENTER.  
Remain  
0h30m  
2
Select a title to add to the Play List.  
Tip  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight an Original title then  
press ENTER to add it and display the Play List.  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when  
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing  
ENTER.  
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add as many titles as  
necessary to the Play List.  
Title Name  
Play  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long  
for VR mode and HDD recordings, and up to 40  
characters for Video mode recordings.  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
1
Highlight the title you want to play.  
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or  
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel.  
rename).  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the command  
menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
Play  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 4ch
Erase  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
2
4
Titles  
10Titles  
Edit  
9
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9ch
Genre Name  
12/2THU 10:00PM 7c
Multi-Mode  
Title name  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
8
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
9
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9
Divide  
Chapter Edit  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
8
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
Lock  
HDD  
SP  
12/2THU 10:00PM 
Cancel
Remain  
30h30m  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
HDD  
SP  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
Key  
1
Characters  
Key  
6
Characters  
Input Title Name  
11/04Wed 12:30PM 2ch LP  
. , ’ ? ! – & 1  
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
a b c 2 ä à á â ã  
æ ç  
p q r s 7 $  
2
7
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
*1  
ÿ/ß  
_
&
~
}
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
1
3
d e f 3 è é ë ê  
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡  
j k l 5 £  
t u v 8 ü ù û ú  
w x y z 9  
2
3
1
3
4
8
9
¿
/
2
/
4
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
0
5
0
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.  
[cursor back]  
[change case]  
[cursor forward]  
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
ꢌ/  
CLEAR [clear character]  
<space>  
[finish name input]  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/  
).  
~
+
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # % ¥ | + =  
{ } [ ] < >  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name below.  
*1  
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß  
Set Thumbnail  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in  
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in  
that title.  
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the  
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without  
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.  
1
Highlight the title you want to change the  
thumbnail picture for.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command  
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name  
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts  
that you can use to input characters in the name input  
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the  
characters shown.  
menu panel.  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you  
can find the frame you want.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are  
both on the same button (for example a P and an R),  
press to advance the cursor one space manually  
between inputting the two characters.  
10  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
Divide  
9
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9
Chapter Edit  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
8
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM 
Lock  
Cancel
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
3
Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls  
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.  
(, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section  
to erase, then press ENTER.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
shows the start of the section.  
Set Thumbnail (HDD)  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
4ch XP  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
Erase Section (HDD)  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
4ch XP  
Play Pause  
0h01m  
OK  
Exit  
Rec. time  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
You can also use the chapter and time search features  
(press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP buttons.  
Play Pause  
From  
To  
Exit  
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.  
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the  
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end  
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.  
Erase Section  
HDD  
VR mode  
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal  
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording  
made from the TV.  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
1
Highlight the title containing the section you  
want to erase.  
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not  
be able to erase very short sections (less than five  
seconds).  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command  
menu panel.  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
Divide  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
HDD  
VR mode  
Play List only  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that  
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be  
recombined into one again.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
1
Highlight the title you want to divide.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command menu  
panel.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 77  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 77  
Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
4
Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
find the place you want to divide the title.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 77  
Divide Title (HDD)  
4
Select the command you want:  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
4ch XP  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use  
the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the  
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then  
press ENTER.  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
5–1  
Play Pause  
00.00.09.15  
Divide  
Cancel  
Edit Chapter (DVD VR mode Play List)  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
Rec. time 1h00m  
4ch XP  
Chapters  
10  
5
Press ENTER to divide the title at the current  
1–1  
Play  
0.00.00  
playback position.  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the  
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.  
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as  
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99  
chapters per HDD title).  
Divided titles cannot  
be combined.  
OK?  
!
1
2
Yes  
No  
Erase /Move – Erase or move chapters: Select the  
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.  
Select whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
Chapter Edit  
HDD  
VR mode  
Edit Chapter (DVD VR mode Play List)  
11/29Mon  
6:00P
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you  
can edit individual chapters within a title, with  
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.  
Erase  
Move  
Rec. time 1h00m  
Chapter  
003  
0h01m  
Cancel  
001  
002  
004  
005  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
1
Highlight the title that contains the chapters you  
want to edit.  
Move command only: Select the destination for the  
chapter, and press ENTER.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command  
menu panel.  
3
Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent  
chapters and press ENTER.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
Edit Chapter (DVD VR mode Play List)  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
11/29Mon 6:00PM  
Rec. time 1h00m  
4ch XP  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc  
Navigator screen.  
Note  
1.When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.  
2.VR mode Play List only.  
3.It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle  
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command menu  
Set Genre  
panel.  
HDD  
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 
1
Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to.  
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the command  
Divide  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9
Chapter Edit  
Recent First  
All Genres  
menu panel.  
Set Genre  
8
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
Lock  
12/2THU 10:00PM 
Cancel
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
Divide  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9
Chapter Edit  
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be  
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator  
with a padlock icon.  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
Lock  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM 
Cancel
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Move  
VR mode  
Play List only  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a genre for the  
title, then press ENTER.  
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play  
List titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
1
Highlight the title you want to move.  
10  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 
No Category  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command menu  
Free1  
4
Titles  
9
panel.  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 
Free2  
Free3  
Recent First  
All Genres  
F
ree4
Free5  
8
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
Cancel  
12/2THU 10:00PM 
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
1
10Titles  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 
Title name  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
SetThumbnail
EraseSection  
Divide  
4
Titles  
1h00m(1.0G)  
2
3
4
Remain  
30h30m  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
Move  
Combine  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9
Lock  
Cancel  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
DVD  
VR Mode  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
Original only  
Remain  
0h30m  
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased  
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock  
it later.  
3
Select a new position in the Play List for the title,  
then press ENTER.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
1
Important  
10Titles  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the  
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock  
command using the Undo option from the Disc  
Navigator menu.  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
4
Titles  
2
3
4
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Play List  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch SP  
1
Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).  
1h00m(1.0G)  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is  
displayed.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select one of the user-  
Combine  
definable genre names, then press ENTER.  
VR mode  
Play List only  
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
1
Highlight the title you want to combine.  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 
Free1  
Free2
Free3  
Free4  
This title will remain in the same place after combining  
with another title.  
4
Titles  
9
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9
Free5  
Recent First  
All Genres  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command  
8
7
Cancel  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2THU 10:00PM 
menu panel.  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
Remain  
30h30m  
10Titles  
1
2
3
4
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM
Title name  
3
Input a name for the genre.  
SetThumbnail
EraseSection  
Divide  
4
Titles  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 
The name can be up to 12 characters long.  
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
Move  
Combine  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9
Input Genre Name  
Free 1  
Cancel  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
DVD  
CAPS  
small  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
_
&
~
}
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
3
Select another title to combine with the first.  
This title will be appended to the first title selected.  
a
c
£
\
¨
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
/
2
/
4
´
Space  
OK  
Clear  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is  
displayed.  
4
To finish entering the name, highlight ‘OK’ and  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
press ENTER.  
1
2
3
4
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
4
Titles  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Multi-Mode  
Play List  
HDD  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select  
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way  
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at  
once, for example.  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
1
Select ‘Multi  
-Mode’ from the command menu  
Genre Name  
panel.  
HDD  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
Use this command to rename one of the five user-  
definable genres (Free 15).  
10Titles  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 4ch
Erase  
Play  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command menu  
9
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9ch
Genre Name  
12/2THU 10:00PM 7ch
Multi-Mode  
panel.  
Recent First  
All Genres  
8
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3FRI 11:00PM 4ch
HDD  
SP  
Play  
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
Remain  
30h30m  
9
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3FRI 8:00PM 9ch
Genre Name  
12/2THU 10:00PM 7c
Multi-Mode  
Recent First  
All Genres  
2
Select titles from the title list.  
8
7
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER buttons to select. Selected  
titles are marked with a .  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29MON 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
3
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel.  
Frequently asked questions  
• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase  
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
10Titles  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2c
When you erase titles from a DVD-R, the titles are no  
longer displayed, but the content remains on the  
disc. DVD-R is a write-once medium; it can’t be  
erased or rewritten.  
4
Titles  
9
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch
Next  
Recent First  
All Genres  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch
Single Mode  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
• I can’t edit my disc!  
You may find that as the available recording time is  
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no  
longer possible. This is because information about  
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.  
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually  
preventing you from editing further.  
4
Select the command that you want applied to all  
the marked titles.  
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
10Titles  
Erase  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2c
Lock  
Unlock  
4
Titles  
8
7
Change Genre  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch
Single Mode  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch
Cancel  
Recent First  
All Genres  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is  
automatically exited.  
Undo  
Video mode VR mode  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally  
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,  
you can undo the last three edits you made).  
1
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu panel.  
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc  
Navigator screen.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
No title  
Play  
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
Play List  
Create  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
10  
Chapter 10  
The PhotoViewer  
1
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.  
Currently selected thumbnail  
PhotoViewer  
File  
Chair No. 2  
x
Date/Time 5/12/2003 10:00AM  
Size 1920 1440  
File information  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
01. 12/12 TUE  
02. 12/13 WED  
03. 12/14 THU  
04. 12/15 FRI  
05. 12/16 SAT  
06. 12/17 SUN  
07. 12/18 MON  
08. 12/19 TUE  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
Pages in file  
view  
Pages in  
folder list  
1/2  
1/3  
Incompatible/unknown file  
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to select a thumbnail.  
• Use the and buttons to display the previous/  
next page of thumbnails.  
Playing a slideshow  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to  
5
Press ENTER or PLAY to start playing a  
display the PhotoViewer screen.  
slideshow from the selected thumbnail.  
• Use the PREV / NEXT buttons to display the  
previous/next picture, or the PAUSE button to  
pause the slideshow.  
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc  
containing JPEG files is loaded.  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that  
the disc and file formats are compatible with this  
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created  
disc compatibility on page 12).  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be  
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and  
right.  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a folder from the  
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.  
This is normal.  
folder list.  
The first nine images from the selected folder are  
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.  
6
Press STOP or RETURN to return to the  
thumbnail view area.  
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder  
to load the file.  
7
To return to the folder view area, press RETURN  
(or when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).  
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.  
3
Press ENTER or to move to the thumbnail view  
area.  
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.  
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN (or ꢂ  
when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).  
Note  
1.Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the  
Reload function (see the following page).  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
10  
Reloading files from a disc  
If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or  
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload  
function.  
1
Use the button to navigate to the last entry in  
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
2
Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999  
files/99 folders from the disc.  
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the  
1
images.  
Zooming the image  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion  
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move  
the area of the picture displayed.  
1
During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button  
to zoom the picture.  
2x Zoom  
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and  
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to move the zoomed area  
within the picture.  
Rotating an image  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow  
so you can always view pictures the right way up,  
whichever way they were taken.  
During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the  
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.  
Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture  
in increments of 90º.  
Note  
1.You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will  
resume reloading.)  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
11  
Chapter 11  
The Disc Setup menu  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/  
).  
Introduction  
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the  
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,  
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is  
accessed from the Home menu:  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name on page 79.  
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
Basic settings  
Lock Disc  
VR mode  
Input Disc Name  
VR mode Video mode  
• Default setting: Off  
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder  
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from  
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name  
function to change the default disc name to something  
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the  
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.  
Disc Setup  
On  
Off  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
1
Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,  
then ‘Next Screen’.  
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or  
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc  
to make edits, select Off.  
Disc Setup  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Next Screen  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
Important  
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will  
completely erase the disc).  
2
Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long  
for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode disc.  
Input Disc Name  
DISC7  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z  
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
1
3
2
3
1
¿
´
OK  
Space  
Clear  
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.  
• Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
Initialize settings  
11  
Optimize HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
You can initialize a recordable DVD disc for either VR  
mode or Video mode recording.  
You’ll see a message appear on-screen recommending  
you optimize the HDD.  
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be  
automatically initialized for recording according to the  
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 95).  
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file  
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the  
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented  
files.  
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording  
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize  
them for VR mode recording.  
Important  
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.  
During optimization, playback and recording are not  
possible.  
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for  
example if you want to change the recording format of  
the disc. See Initializing a recordable DVD disc on page 56  
for detailed instructions.  
• Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the  
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly  
optimized.  
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.  
Finalize settings  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Start Optimization  
Finalize  
Initialize  
Finalize  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
Optimize HDD  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc  
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer  
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
• Select ‘Start’ to optimize.  
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on  
page 55 for detailed instructions.  
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.  
Undo Finalize  
DVD-RW  
Initialize HDD  
HDD  
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded  
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you  
want to record more material or edit material already on  
the disc.  
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem  
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.  
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for  
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.  
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.  
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs  
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If  
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be  
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this  
command to be able to record on the disc using this  
recorder.  
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Initialize  
Initialize  
Finalize  
1
From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then  
InitializeHDD
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.  
2
Select ‘Start’.  
• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
Chapter 12  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc  
playback, and for recording.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for  
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or LDP).  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.  
external inputs  
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality  
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external  
input. There are several preset settings that suit various  
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
Choosing a preset  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
1
With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU  
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.  
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
1ch  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
Disc Navigator  
TV GUIDE  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Copy  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the picture quality  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
setting you want to adjust.  
1ch  
Memory1  
Photo Viewer  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
3D-Y/C  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
Motion  
Off  
Still  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change the preset.  
YNR  
CNR  
Off  
1ch  
Detail  
Min  
Off  
White AGC  
Tuner  
Detailed Settings  
1
You can adjust the following settings:  
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the  
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to progressive.  
• Use the CH +/– buttons to change the channel of the  
built-in TV tuner.  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for  
film material when the video output is set to  
progressive. Usually this is best left set to Auto; try  
switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural.  
There are six presets available:  
Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts  
VCR – suitable for video cassettes  
LDP – suitable for Laserdiscs  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/color separation.  
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the Y (brightness) component.  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the C (color) component.  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
Note  
1.When the DV input is selected, only Prog. Motion and PureCinema settings can be adjusted.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level  
adjustment.  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
1
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for  
the current preset (TV(CRT), PDP or Professional).  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level.  
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.  
Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of  
darker images.  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and  
green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colors appear.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the currently  
selected picture quality setting.  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
2
Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed  
5
When you have all the settings as you want  
Settings’.  
them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
You can now use the preset for any other input or the  
built-in TV tuner.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
Tip  
3
Select the picture quality setting you want to  
adjust.  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
Memory1  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
YNR  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
Off  
Off  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Setting the picture quality for disc  
playback  
BNR  
Detail  
Off  
White Level  
Black Level  
Min  
Min  
This setting determines how the picture will look when  
playing discs.  
You can adjust the following settings:  
Choosing a preset  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to progressive.  
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME  
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for  
film material when the video output is set to  
progressive. Usually this is best left set to  
Auto 1; try switching to Auto 2, On or Off if the  
picture appears unnatural.  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change the setting.  
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
TV(CRT)  
applied to the Y (brightness) component.  
Detailed Settings  
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of  
flat color, caused by MPEG compression).  
There are six presets available:  
TV(CRT) – suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs  
PDP – suitable for plasma display screens  
Professional – suitable for professional monitors  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.  
Note  
1.When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level.  
Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of  
darker images.  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and  
green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colors appear.  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the currently  
selected picture quality setting.  
5
When you have all the settings as you want  
them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
Tip  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
Audio DRC  
• Default setting: Off  
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, it’s  
easy to lose low level sounds completely—including  
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic  
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level  
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.  
1
During playback or when paused, press HOME  
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
2
3
Select ‘Audio Adjust’.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust DRC from ‘Off‘ to  
‘Max’.  
Audio DRC  
Audio DRC  
Off  
Max  
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the  
settings will depend on the material.  
Tip  
• Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via  
the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to  
Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range  
from your AV amplifier/receiver.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Chapter 13  
The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu  
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.  
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback or recording these settings are  
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.  
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.  
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.  
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Basic Settings  
Clock Setting  
Auto  
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set  
automatically.  
Manual •  
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you  
can set the time and date manually.  
• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.  
• When using EPG data download, the clock is set automatically and this setting is unavailable. To be able to use this setting again, reset the unit  
to its default settings.  
Help Setting  
On •  
Off  
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.  
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP  
on the remote to manually display the Help screen.)  
Setup Navigator  
Tuner Settings  
Start  
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting  
up on page 25.  
Auto Channel Setting Antenna •  
Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It takes a few  
moments for the auto tuning to complete.  
Cable  
Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few moments for the  
auto tuning to complete.  
Manual CH Setting  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings  
made by auto tuning.  
• Change channels using the CH +/– buttons.  
To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned  
to that channel), change the Skip setting to On.  
To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off  
then adjust the Level setting.  
• Note that you can’t use the Auto Channel Setting or the skip feature (in the Manual Channel Setting) after completing the TV Guide setting.  
Video Out Settings  
Component Video Out Interlace •  
Progressive  
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video.  
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating  
instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Audio In Settings  
External Audio  
Stereo •  
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is stan-  
dard stereo.  
Dual Mono  
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.  
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or dual  
mono. This has priority over the setting you make here.  
Dual Mono Recording L •  
Select to record the left channel of an external dual mono source when  
recording to DVD in Video mode, to HDD with HDD Recording Format  
set to Video Mode On, or in LPCM mode.  
R
As above, but for right channel recording.  
When recording dual mono audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except  
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.  
DV Input  
Stereo 1 •  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot)  
from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that sup-  
ports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio  
tracks.  
Input Level (L1–L3)  
-6dB – +6dB  
(default: 0 dB)  
Adjust the input level separately for each of the external inputs from  
–6dB to +6dB in steps of 3dB.  
Audio Out Settings  
Digital Out  
On •  
Off  
Activates the digital audio output.  
Deactivates the digital audio output.  
When set to Off, all the following Audio Out settings are grayed out.  
Dolby Digital Out  
DTS Out  
Dolby Digital •  
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being  
played.  
Dolby Digital PCM Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your con-  
nected equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.  
On •  
Off  
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.  
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use  
when your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this  
case, use the analog audio outputs.  
96 kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
96 kHz 48 kHz •  
Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your con-  
nected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.  
96 kHz  
MPEG  
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.  
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is  
being played.  
MPEG PCM •  
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your  
connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Language Settings  
OSD Language  
English •  
français  
English •  
French  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to French.  
Audio Language  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to French.  
Other  
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the  
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on  
page 97.  
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.  
Subtitle Language  
English •  
French  
Other  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to French.  
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the  
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on  
page 97.  
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.  
Auto Language  
On •  
On this setting:  
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language  
will play using that language, without subtitles.  
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but  
that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original  
audio track with subtitles.  
Off  
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle  
language preferences.  
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.  
DVD Menu Language  
w/Subtitle Language Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the  
subtitle language.  
English  
French  
Other  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to French.  
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the  
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on  
page 97.  
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.  
Subtitle Display  
On •  
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Lan-  
guage and Auto Language preferences.  
Off  
Select to switch off subtitle display.  
Assist Subtitle  
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.  
Some discs may override these settings.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Recording Settings  
Manual Recording  
On (go to setup)  
Off •  
All the standard recording modes, plus MN132, LPCM and XP+  
modes can be set.  
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be  
set.  
See also Manual recording modes on page 105 for detailed information on manual recording levels.  
Optimized Rec  
On  
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to  
fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality set-  
ting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1, then the recording will  
start at MN1 and stop when all the available space is used up.  
Off •  
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media,  
the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.  
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set.  
Set Thumbnail  
0 seconds •  
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first  
frame of the title.  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title.  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10  
minutes.  
15 minutes  
VR Mode •  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when  
loaded into the recorder for the first time.  
Video Mode  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording.  
HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off  
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if  
you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD.  
Video Mode On •  
Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode record-  
ings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to  
a Video mode DVD as high-speed copy can be used.  
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a broadcast with a SAP channel. On the Video  
Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Dual Mono Recording on page 93.  
Playback Settings  
TV Screen Size  
4:3 (Letter Box) •  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
16:9  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format  
presentation for widescreen material.  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan pre-  
sentation for widescreen material.  
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine  
how 4:3 material will look.  
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override  
this setting.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Field  
Explanation  
Still Picture  
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.  
Produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than Field stills.  
Frame  
Auto •  
The recorder automatically selects Field or Frame type still, according  
to the material playing.  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
On  
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the  
edit points.  
Off •  
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during play-  
back of a VR mode Play List.  
Set Password  
In order to change the parental lock level or change the country/area  
code, set the password using this option. From the following screen,  
enter a four-digit number that will be your password.  
Change Password  
Change Level  
In order to change the password, first enter your existing password  
and then a new one from the following screen.  
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a  
parental lock level.  
Country/Area Code  
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a  
country/area code.  
Only certain discs have parental lock and country code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your  
password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 98.  
Angle Indicator  
On •  
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a  
DVD-Video disc.  
Off  
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.  
Options  
On-Screen Display  
On •  
Off  
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.  
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.  
Front Panel Display  
On •  
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in  
standby.  
Off  
The front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights  
dimly when setting a timer recording).  
Remote Control Mode Recorder 1–3  
(default: Recorder 1)  
If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to  
different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote  
controller ID, press and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The  
remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Additional information about component  
video output  
Selecting other languages for language  
options  
If you switch the Component Video Out setting to  
Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible  
with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see  
anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and  
hold the STOP button on the front panel, then press  
PLAY. This will set the recorder’s video output back to  
Interlace.  
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.  
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu  
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.  
2
Select the language you want.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Audio DVDMenu Language  
Tuner  
Subti
Language  
English  
Video Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language
Recording  
Playback  
Auto
0
1
4
Number  
DVD
5
Compatibility of this unit with progressive-scan TVs  
Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets  
are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to  
be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan  
picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the  
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output (Interlace). If there  
are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model,  
please contact our customer service center.  
Subti
• Select by language name: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to  
change the language.  
• Select by code number: Press then use the  
number buttons to enter the four-digit language  
code.  
This recorder is compatible with the following Pioneer displays  
and monitors  
Plasma display  
See Language code list on page 107 for a list of available  
languages and corresponding codes.  
• PDP-505HD, PDP-502MX, PDP-5030HD, PDP-4330HD, Pro-  
1000HD, Pro-800HD, PDP-5031, PDP-4300, Pro-1000HDI, Pro-  
800HDI, PDP-5040HD, PDP-4340HD, Pro-1110HD, Pro-910HD,  
Pro-810HD, Pro-1010HD, Pro-920HD, Pro-1120HD, PDP-4345HD,  
PDP-5045HD, PDP-4350HD, PDP-5050HD, PDP-4304, PDP-5004,  
PDP-4300.  
3
Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.  
Projection monitor receiver  
• Pro-700HD, Pro-710HD, Pro-610HD, Pro-510HD, Pro-720HD,  
Pro-620HD, Pro-520HD, SD-641HD5, SD-582HD5, SD-532HD5,  
SD-533HD5, SD-643HD5, Pro-730HD, Pro-630HD, Pro-530HD,  
Pro-730HDI, Pro-530HDI, Pro-730HD, Pro-630HD, Pro-530HD  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Chapter 14  
Additional information  
Maker  
Code  
Resetting the recorder  
Aiwa  
38  
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory  
Funai  
36  
settings.  
GE  
11, 28  
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.  
General  
Goldstar  
Grandiente  
Hitachi  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
34  
2
ON.  
Press and hold STOP and press STANDBY/  
10, 23  
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.  
30  
06, 24, 25, 32  
12, 29  
Setting up the remote to control your  
TV  
09  
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be  
able to use this feature you first have to program the  
remote with a maker code from the table below.  
37  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
RCA  
08, 22, 41  
07  
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then  
enter the maker code for your TV.  
The LED indicator on the remote controls lights.  
00, 35, 40, 44  
01, 15, 16, 17, 18  
14, 21  
See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is  
more than one code given for your make, input the first  
one in the list.  
Sanyo  
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the  
table below, you will not be able to use this remote to  
control your TV.  
Sharp  
02, 19, 27  
04  
Sony  
2
Press TV to check that the remote works with  
Toshiba  
JVC  
05, 26, 31, 43  
13, 33, 42  
03, 20  
your TV.  
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/  
off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your  
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.  
Zenith  
Using the TV remote control buttons  
The table below shows how to use this remote control  
with your TV.  
Button  
What it does  
TV  
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)  
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input  
TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume  
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Screen sizes and disc formats  
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
16:9  
The program is shown in  
widescreen with black bars at  
the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
The sides of the program are  
cropped so that the picture  
fills the whole screen.  
4:3  
The program appears  
squashed. Set to either 4:3  
(Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan &  
Scan).  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The program is presented  
correctly on either setting.  
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
16:9  
The program is presented in  
widescreen.  
4:3  
16:9  
Your TV will determine how the  
picture is presented—check  
the manual that came with the  
TV for details.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Minimum copying times  
14  
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video (extra time will be required for  
initializing and finalizing a disc).  
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc manufacturer for  
compatibility.  
DVD disc type  
*3  
*4  
*4  
*5  
*5  
Rec  
mode  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/8x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/16x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/16x  
*1  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/6x  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.0, 1.1  
*2  
*3  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x  
1.5 mins.  
2 mins.  
SEP  
SLP  
EP  
6 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
10 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
60 mins.  
3 mins.  
4 mins.  
1.25 mins.  
1.5 mins.  
2 mins.  
1.1 mins.  
1.25 mins.  
1.5 mins.  
2 mins.  
1 min.  
1.1 mins.  
1.25 mins.  
1.5 mins.  
3 mins.  
5 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
4 mins.  
LP  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
5 mins.  
SP  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
4 mins.  
XP  
10 mins.  
8 mins.  
6 mins.  
Note that all times in the above table are approximate.  
*1 Compatible with single speed recording only  
*2 Compatible with 2x speed recording  
*3 Compatible with 4x speed recording  
*4 Compatible with 8x speed recording.  
*5 Compatible with 12x speed recording.  
Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being  
recorded.  
The table below shows 16x DVD-R and 6x DVD-RW disc brands that have been tested for high-speed writing  
compatibility with this recorder.  
*1  
*2  
16x DVD-R  
6x DVD-RW  
Maker  
Manufacturer ID  
Maker  
Manufacturer ID  
Sony  
That’s  
“SONY08D1”  
“TYG02”  
JVC  
MCC (MKM)  
“JVC1Victord7”  
“MKM01RW6x”  
TDK  
Maxell  
MCC(MKM)  
“TTH02”  
“MXL RG03”  
“MCCRG20”  
*1 Compatible with 12x speed recording  
*2 Compatible with 6x speed recording  
Note  
1.There may be cases where even 2x/4x/6x/8x/16x compatible discs do not copy at full speed. High speed copying is not possible when using  
discs initialized on another recorder.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
14  
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this  
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the  
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the  
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
The disc is automatically ejected  
after closing the disc tray  
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM, dual disc (DVD/CD hybrid  
disc) or other incompatible format disc (page 10).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 109).  
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 112).  
No picture  
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 14).  
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct  
input.  
• Make sure that the disc is NTSC format.  
• The recorder may be set to progressive-scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to  
interlace by pressing and holding the STOP button (front panel) then pressing  
PLAY.  
• The recorder may be set to progresive scan with an incompatible TV.  
Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel STOP button then  
pressing PLAY.  
Can’t play a disc  
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM, dual disc (DVD/CD hybrid  
disc) or other incompatible format disc (page 10).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 109).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so  
for the condensation to evaporate.  
Can’t record a disc  
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or other incompatible format  
disc (page 10)  
All settings are reset  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,  
all the settings will be lost.  
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the  
power cord.  
Remote control does not work  
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL  
IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 14).  
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 96). (When  
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)  
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 10).  
• Replace the batteries (page 10).  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Problem  
Remedy  
No sound or sound is distorted  
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume  
turned up.  
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow  
motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.  
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or  
DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make  
sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Out setting is On.  
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,  
switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.  
• Check the audio cable connections (page 14).  
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.  
The picture from the external input • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot  
is distorted connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.  
Screen is stretched vertically or hori- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 95) is correct for the kind of TV  
zontally  
you have (see also page 99).  
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the  
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1  
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio  
(standard) video.  
Can’t play a disc recorded using this • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 55).  
recorder on another player  
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video  
mode and finalized.  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW  
compatible in order to play it (page 10).  
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM  
compatible players (page 50).  
During playback the picture is dark • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display  
or distorted  
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.  
Can’t control your TV using this  
remote control  
• If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn  
(page 98).  
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of  
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.  
Can’t record or does not record suc- • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.  
cessfully  
• For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.  
• The HDD may contain up to 999 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999  
chapters (VR mode),or 99 Chapters (Video mode). Check that these limits have not  
been reached.  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.  
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 87).  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
Timer program doesn’t record suc- • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV  
cessfully  
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.  
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected  
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material  
(page 50).  
Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will  
record completely.  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Problem  
Remedy  
After briefly unplugging or after a • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from  
power failure the front panel dis-  
play shows ‘--:--’  
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last  
approximately five years from factory shipping.  
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the  
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.  
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’  
when a button is pressed  
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 38).  
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for  
DVD)  
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a  
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.  
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One  
Touch Copy will not work.  
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch  
Copy feature can’t be used.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.  
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than  
HDD)  
999 titles on the HDD.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.  
The picture freezes and the front  
panel and remote control buttons  
stop working  
• Press STOP then try restarting playback.  
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then  
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold  
STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off.  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
• I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in XP  
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?  
Frequently asked questions  
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked  
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it  
can do.  
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of XP  
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a  
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could  
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of  
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using  
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the  
material in SP (or Optimized) mode so as to fit it all on  
to one disc (note that there will be a loss in picture  
quality if you do this).  
• How do I make a high-quality copy?  
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy  
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,  
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared  
to the original.  
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a  
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we  
recommend that you change the recording mode to  
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the  
available space on the disc.  
See also Copying and back-up on page 66.  
• Can I record a broadcast containing a main and SAP  
channel to the HDD, keeping both audio channels and  
switch them on playback?  
See also Copying and back-up on page 66.  
Yes. When HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off (see HDD Recording Format on page 95)  
and SAP is selected as the broadcast audio channel,  
both channels of the broadcast are recorded (unless  
you set the recording mode to LPCM, in which case  
only the channel set using the Dual Mono Recording  
setting will be recorded; see Using the built-in TV  
tuner on page 28).  
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had  
the commercials edited out?  
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit  
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to  
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out  
the commercials, then record that to DVD.  
See also Copying and back-up on page 66.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as  
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/  
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo  
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see  
DV Input on page 93).  
• Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-  
RW) to the HDD?  
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the  
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing  
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc  
as you want to copy.  
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 or 48kHz  
(not 44.1kHz).  
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the  
source component pauses playback or plays an  
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the  
source component, or the DV cable becomes  
disconnected.  
See also Copying from DVD to HDD on page 70.  
• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?  
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD  
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R  
or DVD-RW disc.  
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output  
functionality.  
See also Copying from DVD to HDD on page 70.  
DV-related messages  
You may see the following messages appear on your TV  
screen when using the DV IN jack.  
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a  
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from  
the HDD?  
No DV camcorder connected. – The camcorder is  
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched  
off.  
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR  
mode disc. You can also divide the recording on the  
HDD into a number of smaller titles if the whole  
recording won’t fit on to one disc.  
The DV camcorder is recording. – The camcorder is  
recording, so you cannot start recording from the  
camcorder to this recorder.  
See also Copying from HDD to DVD on page 67.  
You cannot connect more than one DV  
camcorder at the same time. – The DV jack on this  
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.  
• Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another  
DVD player?  
No tape in the DV camcorder. – There is no  
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.  
Yes, you can generally play finalized Video mode  
discs recorded on this recorder on any standard DVD  
player. You may find, however, that some players will  
not play some recordable media.  
The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. – The  
camcorder is in record-pause mode.  
DV camcorder playback canceled.  
Recording has been paused. – Recording was  
paused because the camcorder is not in playback  
mode.  
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW  
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.  
Cannot operate the DV camcorder. – This recorder  
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the  
camcorder then switching it back on.  
About DV  
DVR-633/533H-S only  
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-  
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV  
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.  
Could not operate the DV camcorder. – This  
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.  
Recording has stopped because the recorded  
material on the tape finished. – When the recorded  
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder  
automatically stops recording.  
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.  
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format  
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and  
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.  
Recording has stopped because DV camcorder  
playback stopped. – Recording stopped because  
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the  
camcorder was disconnected.  
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at  
a time to this recorder.  
The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please  
select playback mode on the DV camcorder. – The  
camcorder is in camera mode.  
• You cannot control this recorder from external  
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.  
• It may not always be possible to control the  
connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Manual recording modes  
14  
The table below shows the approximate recording times for a VR mode and Video mode DVD in each manual recording  
mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a  
noticeable change in picture quality.  
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in  
Linear PCM format.  
Video mode Off (HDD)  
VR mode (DVD)  
Video mode On (HDD)  
Video mode (DVD)  
Resolution Level  
Rec. time  
Level  
Rec. time Resolution  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
MN 7  
MN 8  
MN 9  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
41 mins.  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
MN 7  
MN 8  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
41 mins.  
SEP  
SLP  
352 x 240  
352 x 240  
352 x 480  
EP  
LP  
352 x 480  
480 x 480  
MN 9  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
XP+*  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
XP+*  
544 x 480  
SP  
720 x 480  
720 x 480  
XP  
* XP+ mode is available for HDD recording only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be recorded in MN32 mode.  
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to  
one recordable DVD).  
See also Recording on page 49.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Additional information for cable/  
satellite/STB (set-top box) users  
The following instructions show how to use the timer  
features of your STB with this recorder.  
Setting up  
1
Connect the STB’s audio/video outputs to a set of  
audio/video inputs on this recorder.  
2
Switch on both the STB and this recorder and  
switch the recorder’s input function to the STB (L1,  
L2 or L3).  
To check that everything is connected properly, switch on  
your TV and select this recorder as the video input. You  
should see whatever the STB is tuned to.  
3
Program the IR controller supplied with your STB  
to send start/stop recording codes for a Pioneer VCR.  
See the manual that came with the STB for how to do  
this.  
Only the REC and STOP codes have any effect when used  
with this recorder:  
REC – Start recording  
STOP – Stop recording  
4
Position the IR controller so that it will control  
this recorder.  
The IR sensor on the recorder is located just above the ꢂ  
mark on the front panel.  
Making a timer recording  
1
Set the timer on the STB.  
See the manual that came with your STB for how to do  
this.  
2
Switch on this recorder.  
You must leave the recorder on until the recording  
finishes.  
• At the programmed times, the STB will start and stop  
recording on this recorder.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Language code list  
Language (Language code letter), Language code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Spanish (es), 0519  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Sinhalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Laothian (lo), 1215  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Thai (th), 2008  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Byelorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tonga (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Romanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Sangho (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Country/Area code list  
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter  
Argentina, 0118, ar  
Australia, 0121, au  
Austria, 0120, at  
Belgium, 0205, be  
Brazil, 0218, br  
Canada, 0301, ca  
Chile, 0312, cl  
Finland, 0609, fi  
France, 0618, fr  
Germany, 0405, de  
Hong Kong, 0811, hk  
India, 0914, in  
Indonesia, 0904, id  
Italy, 0920, it  
Japan, 1016, jp  
Malaysia, 1325, my  
Mexico, 1324, mx  
Netherlands, 1412, nl  
New Zealand, 1426, nz  
Norway, 1415, no  
Pakistan, 1611, pk  
Philippines, 1608, ph  
Portugal, 1620, pt  
Singapore, 1907, sg  
Spain, 0519, es  
Sweden, 1905, se  
Switzerland, 0308, ch  
Taiwan, 2023, tw  
Thailand, 2008, th  
United Kingdom, 0702, gb  
USA, 2119, us  
China, 0314, cn  
Denmark, 0411, dk  
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr  
Russian Federation, 1821, ru  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
On-screen displays and recorder displays  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation  
of their meaning.  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.  
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically  
initializes it.  
• Incompatible region number.  
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the  
recorder and so will not play.  
• Cannot record any more titles.  
• No more space for file management data.  
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.  
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum  
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/  
chapters or combine chapters.  
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-  
ization.  
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the  
finalization in order to recording/editing.  
• Cannot play this disc.  
• This disc cannot be recorded.  
• Cannot read the CPRM information.  
• Could not record the information to the disc.  
• Cannot edit.  
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and  
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even  
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• Could not initialize disc.  
• Could not complete finalization successfully.  
• Could not undo finalization successfully.  
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.  
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.  
The disc loaded is a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or some other  
incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is  
dirty or damaged.  
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-  
patible.  
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/  
RW disc with CPRM for recording.  
• Cannot record this content using Video mode  
recording.  
• This content is copy protected.  
• Incorrect CPRM information.  
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.  
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder  
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• The audio will conform to the [Dual Mono  
Recording] setting.  
When recording from an external input in Video mode (DVD), Video  
Mode On (HDD), or in LPCM mode, you can only record the left or  
right channel; not both.  
• Repairing disc.  
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when  
the power is restored.  
• Could not repair the disc.  
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The  
contents of the recording will be lost.  
• Overheating has stopped operation.  
Press DISPLAY to clear this message.  
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the  
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a  
Pioneer authorized service center.  
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre- No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a  
cordable.  
blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.  
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input  
or the input signal is unrecordable.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can be The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to  
done using Disc Setup. maintain playback and recording performance.  
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can be The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to  
done using Disc Setup.  
maintain performance.  
• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized.  
Please optimize again.  
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is  
likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for  
optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from  
the HDD and optimize again.  
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.  
Handling discs  
Damaged discs  
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave  
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold  
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.  
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can  
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise  
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging  
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and  
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the  
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the  
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc  
becoming unusable.  
the recorder.  
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully  
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not  
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all  
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped  
discs.  
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,  
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly  
from the center to the outside edge as shown in the  
diagram below.  
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a  
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a  
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or  
other cleaning agents, including products designed for  
cleaning vinyl records.  
Cleaning the pickup lens  
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in  
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction  
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-  
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are  
commercially available, we do not recommend using  
them since some may damage the lens.  
Storing discs  
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl  
records, you should still take care to handle and store  
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to  
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in  
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including  
under direct sunlight).  
Condensation  
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a  
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing  
instrument. These could all damage the disc.  
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is  
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the  
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the  
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may  
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you  
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for  
about an hour before switching on and using.  
For more detailed care information see the instructions  
that come with discs.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Hints on installation  
14  
Glossary  
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so  
please bear in mind the following points when choosing  
a suitable location for it:  
Analog audio  
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.  
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical  
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See  
also Digital audio.  
Do...  
Use in a well-ventilated room.  
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,  
shelf or stereo rack.  
Aspect ratio  
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.  
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is  
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen  
is almost twice as wide as it is high).  
Don’t...  
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or  
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-  
generating appliances.  
Chapter  
Place on a window sill or other place where the  
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.  
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room  
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.  
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other  
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on  
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See  
also Title.  
Digital audio  
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in  
use.  
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During  
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals  
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-  
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On  
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an  
analog signal based on these numbers. See also  
Sampling frequency and Analog audio.  
Use near a television or monitor as you may  
experience interference—especially if the television uses  
an indoor antenna.  
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder  
may be exposed to smoke or steam.  
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this  
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.  
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large  
Dolby Digital  
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.  
Moving the recorder  
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if  
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ꢇ  
STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking  
that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off.  
Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power  
cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or  
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be  
damaged.  
®
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to  
create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital  
sound tracks at home. The technology, when utilized  
instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc  
space, allowing for higher video resolution or extended  
recording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using  
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD-  
Video players.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
DRM (Digital Rights Management)  
MPEG audio  
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a  
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by  
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the  
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record  
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction  
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other  
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.  
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD  
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format  
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV  
amp/receivers. See also PCM.  
MPEG video  
DTS  
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD  
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the  
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.  
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround  
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a  
popular surround sound format for movies.  
Optical digital output  
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light  
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks  
using a special optical cord, available from specialist  
audio dealers.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Dynamic range  
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)  
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds  
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting  
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are  
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic  
cinema-like effects.  
The most common system of encoding digital audio,  
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a  
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital  
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio  
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with  
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and  
MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio.  
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)  
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still  
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers  
use this compressed file format which carries date, time  
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.  
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD only)  
A system of navigating a Video CD through on-screen  
menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good for discs  
that you would normally not watch from beginning to end  
all at once—karaoke discs, for example.  
File extension  
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type  
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.  
Progressive scan video  
Also called non-interlaced video, this method of  
displaying a picture updates all the lines in one pass,  
resulting in a more stable, flicker-free image than  
interlaced video (for a given scanning rate).  
ISO 9660 format  
International standard for the volume and file structure of  
CD-ROM discs.  
JPEG  
PureCinema  
A file format used for still images, such as photographs  
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file  
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this  
format.  
Video on a DVD disc may be either video material  
(originally shot on video) or film material (originally shot  
on film). Video material has a frame rate of 30 frames/  
second, compared to 24 frames/second for film. This  
recorder converts film material to 60 frames/second (in  
progressive scan mode). PureCinema adjusts the picture  
so that it matches more closely the picture quality of a  
cinema screen.  
MP3  
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file  
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”  
or “.MP3”.  
You can see whether video on a DVD disc is film or video  
material by displaying the transfer rate. If a ‘#’ appears  
above the transfer rate display, it is film material.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Regions (DVD-Video only)  
Specifications  
ALL  
1
(example region code marks)  
Regions associate discs and players with particular  
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have  
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of  
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are  
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).  
General  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,  
Video-CD,CD,  
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 V, 60 Hz  
Power consumption  
DVR-531H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 W  
DVR-532H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 W  
DVR-533H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 W  
DVR-633H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 W  
Sampling frequency  
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into  
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the  
sound quality, but the more digital information is  
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency  
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples  
Power consumption in standby mode  
0.42 W  
(Front panel display: off)  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg (9 lb 1 oz )  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 (W) x 59 (H) x 273 (D) mm  
(16 9/16 (W) x 2 3/8 (H) x 10 3/4 (D) in.)  
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5°C to +35°C  
(+41°F to +95°F)  
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 85%  
(no condensation)  
TV format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC  
(measurements) per second. See also Digital audio.  
Title  
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also  
Chapter.  
Track  
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the  
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.  
See also Chapter.  
Recording  
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DVD Video Recording  
DVD-VIDEO  
WMA  
Recordable discs  
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)  
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)  
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an  
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft  
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using  
Windows Media Player version 9 or 10, or Windows  
Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by  
their file extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5MHz  
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz  
Compression format . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
(uncompressed)  
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are  
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Recording time  
HDD (160GB)  
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 23 hours  
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 34 hours  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 68 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 136 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 204 hours  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 272 hours  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 340 hours  
Manual Mode (MN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 23–455 hours  
HDD (80GB)  
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 11 hours  
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 17 hours  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 34 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 68 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 102 hours  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 136 hours  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 170 hours  
Manual Mode (MN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 17–227 hours  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
DVD-R/DVD-RW  
Supplied accessories  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 hours  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 hours  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–13 hours  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
G-LINK™ cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Blank DVD-RW disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Quick Start Guide  
Operating Instructions  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
VHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13ch  
UHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–69ch  
CATV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C1–C125ch  
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject  
to change without notice, due to improvement.  
Timer  
Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (12-hour digital display)  
Power off memory. . . . Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal. . . . VHF/UHF set  
75 (F-shape connector)  
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1,3 (rear), 2 (front)  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jack  
Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jack  
S-Video input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)  
Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (color) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN  
S-Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2  
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (color) - Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN  
Component video output  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 )  
P , P : 0.7 Vp-p (75 )  
B
R
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks  
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R  
Input level  
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms  
(Input impedance: more than 22 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks  
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 L/R  
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms  
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks  
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack  
DV input (DVR-633/533H-S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front)  
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)  
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Minijack  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
DVD  
activity display 32  
A
Audio  
aspect ratios 95, 99  
backing up 74  
compatibility 10, 49, 100  
DVD-R vs DVD-RW 11, 12, 49, 100  
finalizing 12, 55, 88  
digital output settings 93  
DV audio settings 54  
dynamic range control 91  
external audio settings 93  
input settings 93  
setting preferences for audio language 94  
setting which channel to record 52  
switching on playback 64, 65  
switching TV audio 29  
initializing 49, 88  
playback controls for 30, 5765  
selecting for playback/recording 27  
Video mode vs VR mode 11, 12, 49, 77, 88, 95  
E
C
Editing 7684  
CD Audio  
Video mode compatibility and frame accuracy 77,  
compatibility 10  
95  
playback controls for 31, 5965  
Chapter  
Video mode vs VR mode 77  
automatic chapter marking 95  
definition 110  
editing 72, 81  
G
G-LINK™ 14, 17, 18  
maximum number per title/disc 49  
Copying  
H
HDD  
from DVD to HDD 67, 70  
from HDD to DVD 6769, 100  
high-speed 66, 73, 100  
One Touch Copy 66  
real-time 66, 73  
restrictions and copyright 66  
Video mode compatible and frame accurate 71, 72,  
73  
activity display 32  
backing up content to DVD 74  
disk space and recording quality 105  
playback controls for 30  
precautions 13  
selecting for playback/recording 27  
Video mode compatibility 49, 77, 95  
Home menu 32  
D
Dolby Digital  
J
JPEG  
dual mono sources and 65  
explained 110  
output setting 93  
DTS  
file compatibility 12  
viewing in the PhotoViewer 85  
CD audio encoded with 31  
explained 111  
output setting 93  
DV camcorder  
L
Language  
audio 64, 94  
code list 107  
DVD menu 94  
setting for menus and displays (OSD) 25, 94  
settings for DVD playback 94  
subtitle 94  
connecting 14, 20  
error messages 104  
recording from 53  
setting the audio track to record 93  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
T
Title  
MP3 audio files 11, 111  
defined 112  
maximum number recordable 49  
maximum recordable length 49  
thumbnails 79, 95  
P
Picture quality  
recording time vs 50, 105  
setting for playback 90  
setting for recording 89  
video connections and 16  
Play List  
compared to Original 13  
creating on a VR mode disc 78  
switching to Play List view 76  
Playback 2931, 5765  
on-screen displays 33  
parental lock for DVD-Video 96  
picture quality settings for 90  
settings 95  
TV channels  
automatic tuning 92  
automatic tuning in the Setup Navigator 25  
changing 28  
manual setting 92  
numbering 28  
Recording - see Recording TV programs  
SAP audio channels and 29  
TV Guide On Screen™  
recording programs using 37  
searching for a program 40  
setting a reminder to watch a program 39  
setting up 27, 45  
using 3547  
R
Recording 27, 4956  
audio format 50  
V
Video CD  
automatic chapter marking 95  
copyright and 50  
from a camcorder 53  
from an external input 53  
on-screen displays 34  
optimized 95  
compatibility 10  
playback control (PBC) 31, 57  
playback controls for 31, 5965  
W
settings 95  
WMA audio files 11, 12, 112  
simultaneous playback and 52  
time and picture quality 50, 105  
timer programs 37  
TV channels with SAP audio channels 52  
TV programs 27, 37, 51  
Video mode vs VR mode 49  
Remote control  
buttons explained 2223  
changing the batteries 10  
operating range 10  
setting the remote ID 96  
setting up for TV control 98  
S
Subtitles  
setting preferences for 94  
switching during playback 64  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service,  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2005 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_A_En  
Printed in China  
<VRB1407-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Carrying Case SJA7180 User Manual
Philips Clock Radio AJ3112 12 User Manual
Philips DVD Player DVD712 User Manual
Philips Headphones SHU2000 User Manual
Pioneer Speaker System S DV525 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo Receiver sc 9540 User Manual
Pioneer Turntable PLASMA DISPLAY User Manual
Polk Audio Speaker System LC80fx User Manual
Polycom Server DOC2565A User Manual
Polycom Telephone IP501 User Manual